all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual Declaration | Users Manual | 760.74 KiB | ||||
1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | External Photos | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos |
1 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB |
Dear Customer, In this operating manual you will learn about the various functions of the PCM (Porsche Communi-
cation Management) system and its operating op-
tions. To prevent danger to yourself and to others, please start by familiarising yourself with your PCM. On-board literature Keep the on-board literature in the vehicle at all times and if you ever come to sell your vehicle, please hand it over to the new owner. Suggestions Do you have any questions, suggestions or ideas about your vehicle or the on-board literature?
Please write to us:
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG Vertrieb Customer Relations Porschestrae 15-19 71634 Ludwigsburg Germany Orientation aids in the operating manual Equipment This operating manual contains four orientation aids to help you quickly locate the information you want. They are each shown against a yellow back-
ground. The master table of contents offers you an overview of the structure of the entire manual. In the section table of contents you will find de-
tailed listings of the individual topics. The index enables you to find the various topics with the help of keywords. There may be some differences in equipment and technology with respect to the illustrations and de-
scriptions due to the ongoing development of the systems and the varying laws in individual coun-
tries. The equipment versions shown are not always in-
cluded as standard. Some of the functions de-
scribed in this operating manual are optional equipment and may not be available in your PCM. If this is the case, the relevant menu items will not be available to you. WKD 952 220 10 03/09 Porsche, the Porsche Crest, Panamera, Carrera, Targa, Boxster, Cayenne, Tiptronic and Tequipment are registered trademarks of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. Printed in Germany. Reprinting (including excerpts) as well as all other forms of reproduction are prohibited without the written permission of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG Porscheplatz 1 70435 Stuttgart Germany 2 Using the PCM..................................... 6 Important information on operation and road safety.....................................................6 Introduction to operation .................................7 Menu types and options for operation.............12 Sound settings .............................................15 Sound settings with BOSE Surround Sound System ..............................................16 Sound settings with Burmester High-
End Surround Sound System .........................17 Configuring the PCM display ..........................18 TUNER............................................... 22 Radio ..........................................................22 Making settings for radio mode......................25 TV ...............................................................27 Making settings for TV mode .........................31 DISC ................................................. 34 iPod* ..........................................................40 USB.............................................................43 External Bluetooth audio source ..................48 Bluetooth settings ......................................49 PHONE .............................................. 54 Bluetooth..................................................54 Operating the Bluetooth hands-free unit
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation)..........56 Telephone settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) ...........66 Bluetooth settings (Bluetooth mobile phone preparation)........................................67 Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) ...........70 Transferring the phonebook...........................71 Operating the PCM telephone.........................72 Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only)..............................83 Telephone settings
(PCM telephone)............................................91 Call settings
(PCM telephone)............................................93 Bluetooth settings
(PCM telephone)............................................95 Phonebook settings ......................................98 Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone)..........................................100 Cordless handset........................................101 Contents INFO ............................................... 109 Displaying traffic messages (TMC)............... 109 Displaying sections of the route................... 111 Displaying information about the location ..... 111 Displaying detailed information about the active audio source .................................... 111 CAR ................................................ 113 Trip data display ........................................ 113 ParkAssist ................................................. 114 Rear view camera ...................................... 116 Logbook.................................................... 119 The Sport display ....................................... 127 Extended memory ...................................... 135 NAVI ............................................... 140 General operation....................................... 140 Entering an address ................................... 141 Starting/stopping route guidance ................ 143 List of previous destinations........................ 144 Personal destination memory ...................... 146 Points of interest........................................ 151 Changing options for route guidance ........... 153 Stopovers (tour)......................................... 155 Destination input using geographical coordinates ........................... 158 Destination input using the map................... 158 Storing...................................................... 158 Off-road navigation ..................................... 159 Reloading data........................................... 164 Contents 3 MAP ................................................166 Map display................................................166 Voice control ...................................172 How voice control works .............................172 Symbols in sample dialogues.......................173 Commands.................................................173 Basic voice control functions .......................175 Using the help function................................177 Operating examples....................................179 Index...............................................194 Technical data .................................202 Radio frequency ranges...............................202 Tuning steps used during automatic station search ............................................202 Regional codes for video DVDs ....................202 Affiliated countries for TV tuner country settings..........................................202 4 Contents Important information on operation and road safety.....................................................6 Introduction to operation .................................7 Switching the PCM on/off..............................7 Setting the volume........................................8 Muting .........................................................8 Selecting the audio source ............................8 Controls and their functions...........................9 Menu types and options for operation.............12 What are the menu types? ...........................12 Calling up and operating menu types............12 Exiting menus.............................................13 Operating lists............................................13 Operating input menus ................................14 Sound settings..............................................15 Setting the bass .........................................15 Setting the treble........................................15 Setting the balance.....................................15 Setting the fader ........................................15 Setting the loudness ...................................16 Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) ........16 Sound settings with BOSE Surround Sound System ..............................................16 Setting surround.........................................16 Setting linear..............................................16 Setting AudioPilot.....................................16 Sound settings with Burmester High-End Surround Sound System ..................17 Setting the listening position........................17 Setting smooth...........................................17 Setting surround.........................................17 Using the PCM Setting live ................................................ 17 Setting sound conditioner........................... 17 Configuring the PCM display.......................... 18 Configuring display settings........................ 18 Setting the language .................................. 19 Setting the units ........................................ 19 Resetting personal settings ........................ 20 Using the PCM 5 CAUTION!
WARNING!
Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-
volving explosives. Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-
ple. They can interfere with technical equip-
ment. Please heed appropriate warnings. Observe statutory regulations and local re-
strictions when using the telephone. Using the PCM Important information on operation and road safety The PCM (Porsche Communication Manage-
ment) system is the central control unit for the ra-
dio, TV tuner, disc mode (CD/DVD, USB, iPod and an external audio source), sound settings, on-
board computer, navigation system and tele-
phone. To avoid danger or injury to yourself and others while using your PCM, you must take the following into consideration:
Injury hazard. Opening the housing or a dam-
aged housing represents a hazard due to invis-
ible laser radiation. The PCM is a Class 1 laser product. Do not open the housing. The PCM does not contain any user-service-
able parts. Any maintenance work must be performed exclusively by qualified service experts. WARNING!
WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle. Operate your PCM only when you are safely in control of your vehicle and traffic condi-
tions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the PCM while the vehicle is parked. Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver and makes recommendations on the routes to take. This does not release you from full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle. As the driver, you must assess the traffic situ-
ation. You have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car. Continue to pay attention to the traffic situ-
ation. 6 Using the PCM Introduction to operation Switching the PCM on/off Switching on/off via the ignition
(permanently) Switch on the ignition. The PCM is permanently active. Switching on/off via the left rotary knob If the PCM is not to be permanently active, you can also switch it on/off using the left rotary knob. Press and hold the left rotary knob (volume control) for at least one second. Battery discharge protection Switching on/off via the left rotary knob is also possible when the ignition is off. To protect your vehicles battery, the PCM will au-
tomatically switch itself off again after a few min-
utes. NOTICE Risk of damage. The PCM contains high-qual-
ity electronic components which require spe-
cial care with regard to maintenance. The following should be observed:
The display is sensitive to scratches. The device must not be sprayed with liq-
uids. Ingress of liquids can result in the de-
struction of the equipment. Carefully clean your PCM periodically using a dry, clean and soft cloth (microfibre cloth) or a cleaning brush. Do not exert excessive pressure on the sur-
face when cleaning.
>>>
Under no circumstances may solvents such as methylated spirits, thinners, petrol, acetone or alcohol (ethanol, methanol or isopropyl alcohol) or scouring agents of any type be used. Remove fingerprints using a slightly damp cloth or a mild cleaning agent. Never spray cleaning agents or other liq-
uids directly onto the display. Instead dampen a cloth and carefully wipe the dis-
play clean. If faults occur, do not open the PCM equip-
ment yourself under any circumstances. Always have defective devices repaired by a qualified specialist workshop. We recom-
mend that this work be performed by a Por-
sche partner, as Porsche partners have trained workshop personnel as well as the necessary parts and tools. Using the PCM 7 Setting the volume Turn the left rotary knob t. Depending on the situation, this adjusts the vol-
ume for:
the active audio source, a traffic announcement, a voice control system announcement, the ringtone during an incoming call, hands-free mode during a telephone call. Muting Muting an audio source Briefly press the left rotary knob u. is shown in the bottom line. This mutes the active audio source. The mute symbol However, navigation recommendations, tele-
phone calls and traffic announcements contin-
ue to be audible. Cancelling muting To cancel muting, briefly press the left rotary knob u again. Muting navigation or traffic announcements To interrupt a navigation or traffic announce-
ment, briefly press the left rotary knob u during the announcement. Selecting the audio source Pressing the a button opens a window where you can set the current audio source. The window closes again as soon as:
you have set an audio source or several seconds pass and you have made no entry. 1. Press the a button. 2. Select the audio source you want on the dis-
play. 8 Using the PCM I Right rotary knob s q: Highlights a menu item r: Selects the highlighted menu item J i button K Back button h L Eject/retract button for CDs and DVDs j M g main menu button N f main menu button O End call button k P c main menu button Q Lift handset button l R n main menu button S m main menu button Using the PCM 9 Controls and their functions The controls for the PCM are arranged below the display and around the CD/DVD slot. A a button B p arrow button C Left rotary knob v t: Sets the volume u (press briefly): Switches on or mutes the device u (press and hold): Switches the device on and off D o arrow button E b main menu button F Slot for SIM card G d main menu button H w main menu button A - a button Pressing the a button opens a window where you can set the current audio source. The window closes again when:
you have set an audio source, several seconds pass and you have made no entry. B - p arrow button By briefly pressing the arrow button you can:
start a search downwards in radio or TV mode, skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode. Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in CD/DVD mode starts fast reverse. C - Left rotary knob v Pressing and holding the left rotary knob u switches the device on or off. Turning the left rotary knob t changes the fol-
lowing settings:
volume of the active audio source, volume of a traffic announcement, volume of a voice control system announce-
ment, volume when in hands-free mode during a tele-
phone call, ringtone volume of the telephone during an in-
coming call, cancelling muting (turning the rotary knob clockwise). D - o arrow button By briefly pressing the arrow button you can:
start a search upwards in radio or TV mode, skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode. Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in CD/DVD mode starts fast forward. E - b main menu button Pressing the b button opens a menu where you can make the sound settings for the PCM. Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u executes the following functions:
cancels navigation and traffic announcements, rejects an incoming telephone call, mutes the device, switches on the system. F - Slot for the telephone SIM card To use the internal telephone, you must insert the SIM card in the slot provided. Alternatively, the SIM card of a mobile phone with the Bluetooth SIM Access Profile can be used. 10 Using the PCM G - d main menu button K- Back button h Pressing the d button displays various gener-
al information such as the current audio source, the date and time and the signal strength for your telephone network. H - w main menu button Pressing the w button opens an overview of various trip data. I - Right rotary knob s Along with the touchscreen, the right rotary knob is the central control:
Turn the rotary knob q to highlight the menu item you want. Press r to select a highlighted menu item. J - i button Since not all of the operating options for a main menu can be shown on one display, the i menu summarises various operating options for the main menus. You call up these operating op-
tions by pressing the i button. Instead of pressing the button you can also touch the tab of the same name on the dis-
play. By pressing the Back button h you can exe-
cute various functions. Briefly press the button to:
undo a selection in the menu, cancel a list selection. Press and hold the button to:
delete all characters already entered into an in-
put menu. L - Eject button j Pressing thej button executes the follow-
ing functions depending on the equipment of your PCM:
PCM without CD/DVD changer A CD or DVD inserted in the drive is ejected so it can be removed. PCM with CD/DVD changer The CD/DVD changer menu is opened. Press-
ing the button again ejects the highlighted CD or DVD so it can be removed. If you press the button for several seconds and there are still no CDs/DVDs in the changer compartments, you will be prompted to fill the individual compartments one after the other. If you press the button for several seconds and the magazine compartments are at least par-
tially full, all CDs or DVDs are ejected one after the other. M - g main menu button Pressing the g button opens the map view of the navigation function. N - f main menu button Pressing the f button opens the menu of the navigation function. O - End call button k By pressing the End call button k you can:
reject an incoming telephone call or end an active call. P - c main menu button Pressing the c button opens the menu of the telephone function. Using the PCM 11 Q - Lift handset button l By pressing the Lift handset button l you can:
accept an incoming telephone call or call up the quick dial function. R - n main menu button Pressing the n button opens the menu for op-
erating the CD, DVD, iPod, USB, AUX and AUX BT audio sources. S - m main menu button Pressing the m button opens the menu for radio mode. Menu types and options for operation The PCM display is a colour touchscreen. All menu functions, list entries and text input fields as well as the arrow symbols and scrollbars can be oper-
ated by lightly touching the corresponding loca-
tion on the display. What are the menu types?
Main menus The range of functions of the PCM is divided be-
tween the following main menus:
m: radio main menu, n: disc main menu, c: telephone main menu, f: navigation main menu, g: map view, b: sound settings, d: information menu as well as w: vehicle and trip data main menu. Each of these main menus contains various sub-
menus for a specific topic. Option menus Each of the eight main menus has an option menu where you find settings and other functions for the respective main menu. Calling up and operating menu types Calling up main menus To call up a main menu, press the appropriate button below the display. You can switch from one main menu to another at any time. When you return to a main menu, you return to the function you were using before exiting the menu. If you want to return to the top level of a main menu, you must press the relevant main menu but-
ton twice in succession. Calling up option menus To call up an option menu, press the i button.
- or -
Touch the tab on the display with your finger. 12 Using the PCM Operating menus with the touchscreen Exiting menus Touch the scrollbar between the two symbols and
. Touch the individual menu items or symbols di-
rectly on the display. If the menu functions cannot be operated by touching the display, it is because the touch-
screen is deactivated. For further information, see Switching the touchscreen on/off on page 19. Operating menus with the right rotary knob Instead of operation on the touchscreen, you can also operate the menu items with the right rotary knob. Turn the right rotary knob t to highlight a menu item. Press u the right rotary knob to activate the highlighted menu item. The process of highlighting q and activat-
ing r using the right rotary knob or touch-
ing the menu item on the display is referred to below as selecting. Returning to the next highest menu Press the Back button h to cancel an op-
eration and return to the next highest menu.
- or -
Turn the right rotary knob q. Highlighted list entries are framed in orange. Returning to the main menu Showing the first letter of list entries Press a main menu button to return to the cor-
responding main menu. Returning to the top level of a main menu Briefly press the appropriate main menu button twice in succession to return to the top level of the main menu. Operating lists The following operating options are available to you for selecting a list entry:
Touch the symbols
- or -
on the display. and To make it easier to find your way in long lists, you can show the first letter of list entries in the follow-
ing lists:
the phonebook, the list for the music search in the iPod or in USB mode, the track list in USB and MP3 disc mode or the destination memory in the navigation menu. Touch and hold one of the two symbols for several seconds. and
- or -
Quickly turn the right rotary knob q. Only letters with corresponding entries in the list will be displayed. Using the PCM 13 inserts a space deletes all entries in the input field calls up a stored list, for example when entering an address in the nav-
igation system confirms the input and closes the input menu Greyed out characters cannot be selected. In many cases the input menus are pre-sort-
ed. This means that after you have entered at least three letters, only the letters for which there is an entry in a list are offered for selec-
tion. In addition to the letter fields, the input menus also provide a number of function fields for changing the character set displayed and for moving the cursor:
deletes the last character entered
(if button is touched briefly)
- or -
deletes all characters entered
(if button is touched and held) switches to positioning mode when composing text messages (SMS) switches to uppercase switches to lowercase switches to numbers and punctua-
tion marks switches to special characters switches to insertion mode when composing a text message inserts a period inserts a comma inserts a colon Operating input menus In many cases you can enter data into the PCM. This can be the case when entering an SMS mes-
sage, a telephone number or a navigation destina-
tion, for example. The various input menus are customised to their respective operating situa-
tions. To enter data into an input menu, lightly touch the characters on the display.
- or -
Highlight the characters by turning the right ro-
tary knob q and insert them by pressing the right rotary knob r. To confirm and accept the data you have en-
tered, select OK. 14 Using the PCM Setting the layout for the keyboard of the input menu The letter fields in the input menu can either be ar-
ranged alphabetically or like a computer key-
board. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Display PCM
> Keyboard layout. 4. Select one of the two options:
ABC:
The letter fields are arranged alphabetically. QWERTY/QWERZ:
The letter fields are arranged like a compu-
ter keyboard. The chosen keyboard layout is set. Sound settings You can set the sound of your PCM for each audio source separately using the sound settings in the Sound menu. As soon as an audio source is se-
lected, its sound settings are set automatically. The range of displays and functions for the sound settings depends on the vehicle type and the equipment installed. In some cases, therefore, not all of the functions described here may be availa-
ble. Setting the bass 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Bass. 3. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. Setting the treble 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Treble. 3. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. Setting the balance The Balance setting allows you to set the volume distribution between the left and right speakers. 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Balance. 3. Make the setting you want by touching the or by turning symbols and q the right rotary knob.
,
, Setting the fader The Fader setting allows you to set the volume dis-
tribution between the front and rear speakers. 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Fader. 3. Make the setting you want by touching the or by turning symbols and q the right rotary knob.
,
, Using the PCM 15 Setting the loudness Loudness increases the sound volume by in-
creasing the bass and treble frequencies. This setting is particularly effective for low vol-
umes and guarantees a pleasant sound. 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Loudness to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) The SDV function automatically adjusts the audio playback volume as a function of the vehicles speed. You can set the degree to which the volume ad-
justs to the vehicles speed on a scale from 0 (no increase in volume) to 5 (large increase in volume). 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SDV. 4. Make the setting you want by touching the symbols and
. Sound settings with BOSE Surround Sound System Setting surround Activating Surround achieves a sound setting with greater spatial depth. This permits the creation of a virtual surround sound with conventional stereo sources such as CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example. The function can be set separately for the individ-
ual audio sources. The Surround function is generally activated with multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for ex-
ample. It cannot be activated for the sources AM and TV. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Surround to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Setting linear Selecting Linear switches the PCM from a bass-
heavy setting (linear off) to a more neutral sound
(linear on). 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Linear to activate (
) the function. deactivate (
) or Setting AudioPilot If the AudioPilot function is activated, the noise level inside the vehicle is monitored. Background noise is analysed and the volume and dynamics of the music playback across the entire frequency spectrum is automatically adjusted. An additional sound control feature is available for vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music playback to the special requirements when driving with an open top. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select AudioPilot to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. 16 Using the PCM Sound settings with Burmester High-End Surround Sound System Setting the listening position The Listening position setting allows you to opti-
mise the sound settings for the front or rear seats. If, on the other hand, you select the symmetrical setting, you achieve the best possible sound set-
ting taking all seats into account. 1. Press the b button. 2. Select Listening position. 3. Select one of the following settings:
Front, Symmetrical or Rear. Setting smooth The Smooth function is used to precisely reduce overemphasized frequencies in the midrange and treble, which may be present in highly com-
pressed music material. Typical examples include playing MP3 files with a low data rate or listening to an FM station with unfavourable reception con-
ditions. This function facilitates a relaxing, pleasant listen-
ing experience for these sources over a long peri-
od. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET Burmester. 4. Select Smooth to activate (
) the function. deactivate (
) or Setting surround Activating Surround achieves a sound setting with greater spatial depth. This permits the creation of a virtual surround sound with conventional stereo sources such as CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example. The function can be set separately for the individ-
ual audio sources. The listening position is then set to Symmetrical. The Surround function is generally activated with multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for ex-
ample. It cannot be activated for the sources AM and TV. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET Burmester. 4. Select Surround to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Setting live The Live function generates surround sound that sounds just like a live concert from any stereo mu-
sic signal. This is achieved through the precise ad-
dition of the type of reverberation and tonal com-
ponents normally found in concert halls. The listening position is set to Symmetrical for this. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET Burmester. 4. Select Live to activate (
the function.
) or deactivate (
) Setting sound conditioner If the Sound conditioner function is activated, the noise level inside the vehicle is monitored. Back-
ground noise is analysed and the volume and dy-
namics of the music playback across the entire frequency spectrum is automatically adjusted. An additional sound control feature is available for vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music playback to the special requirements when driving with an open top. Using the PCM 17 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET Burmester. 4. Select Sound conditioner to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Configuring the PCM display You can set various units, the date and time, the welcome display and the user language of the PCM in the SET PCM system menu.
- or -
Press any button. Choosing colours for the map view (day/
night design) Configuring display settings Switching the display off You can switch off or darken the display using the Switch off display menu. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Display PCM
> Screen. 4. Select Switch off display. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears. Switching the display back on You can switch a display that is off back on at any time (if the touchscreen is active) by touching it. Touch anywhere on the screen with your finger. 18 Using the PCM 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Display PCM. 4. Select Day/night switchover. The following options are then available for you to select:
Automatic Your PCM automatically switches from day design to night design as a function of the vehicle lighting. Day Your PCM always remains set to the day de-
sign colours. This means the display colours are optimised for legibility. Night Your PCM always remains set to the night de-
sign colours. The display colours are dimmed to prevent glare. 5. Set the option you want by selecting it. Choosing the brightness of the display Displaying the system version Selecting the language yourself 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system You have the option of viewing the system version of your PCM. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
> Display PCM
> Screen
> Brightness. symbols and
. 4. You can set the brightness by selecting the two the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Display PCM
> System version. The system version is displayed. Switching the touchscreen on/off 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Display PCM.
> Screen. Setting the language Adapting the language to the instrument cluster 4. Select Touchscreen off to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system The settings of the instrument cluster are set. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
> PCM units. 4. Select Automatic. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM language. 4. Select the language you want. Setting the units Adapting the units to the instrument cluster 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM language. 4. Select Automatic. The language of the instrument cluster is set. If the language of the instrument cluster is not available as a language in the PCM, the lan-
guage English GB is set. Using the PCM 19 Setting the unit for consumption 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM units
> Consump.. 4. Select one of the following units:
l/100km, km/l, mpg or mpg (UK). Setting the display unit for temperatures 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM units
> Temperature. Resetting personal settings This menu item allows you to reset settings you have previously made. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Reset PCM. 4. Select one of the following options:
Factory settings Resets all settings to predefined values. Any data you entered (addresses, destinations and telephone numbers) is, however, re-
tained. Vehicle handover Resets all settings to predefined values and deletes the data you entered (addresses, destinations, telephone numbers, logbook as well as the recordings in the Sport dis-
play). 5. Confirm the relevant prompt by selecting 4. Select either C (Celsius) or F (Fahrenheit). Yes. 20 Using the PCM TUNER Radio ......................................................... 22 Calling up the main menu for radio mode..... 22 Tuning to stations ...................................... 22 Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memories ....................................... 23 Traffic programme (TP) .............................. 24 Making settings for radio mode ..................... 25 Switching RDS on/off................................. 25 Switching regionalisation on/off .................. 25 Switching RDS radio text on/off .................. 25 Choosing a PTY (programme type) filter ..... 26 Setting sorting criteria for the FM station list 26 TV............................................................... 27 Calling up the main menu for TV mode ........ 27 Tuning to TV stations ................................. 27 Storing TV stations .................................... 28 Showing the information window ................. 29 Video text ................................................ 29 Electronic Programme Guide ...................... 30 Making settings for TV mode......................... 31 Setting sorting of the station list ................. 31 Setting the reception country ..................... 31 Setting TV picture parameters ................... 31 TUNER 21 Tuning to stations using the station list The station list contains all the stations that can currently be received. It is only available in FM mode. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is displayed. 2. Select Station list. The station list is opened. In addition to the sta-
tion names, it also contains the respective pro-
gramme types. The station currently tuned to is highlighted in colour. 3. Select a station. Tuning to stations via a station search Start a search by pressing the arrow buttons p and o. The search stops at the next station in the waveband. Tuning to stations You have the following options for tuning to a sta-
tion:
using the station buttons, using the station list, via a station search or entering the frequency directly. Tuning to stations using the station buttons To be able to tune to a station using the station buttons, there must already be a station stored on a station button. To find out more, please refer to the section Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memories on page 23. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want is highlighted. 2. Briefly press the station button. The station stored on the station button is tuned to. TUNERRadio Calling up the main menu for radio mode Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (AM - FM - TV) is highlight-
ed in the bottom line. You will see the main menu for the chosen mode together with the station buttons. If there are al-
ready stations stored on the station buttons, the names or frequencies of these stations are dis-
played. If the station tuned to is broadcasting RDS signals
(RDS = Radio Data System) in FM mode, you will see the information contained in these signals
(e.g. station name, programme type and radio text) above the station buttons. To find out more, please refer also to the sections Switching RDS on/off on page 25 and Switch-
ing RDS radio text on/off on page 25. 22 TUNER Tuning to stations by entering the frequency directly 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is displayed. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Manual tune. The input menu is opened. The frequency of the current station is displayed. 4. Tune to the frequency using one of the follow-
ing options:
Entering it directly by touching the number buttons.
- or -
Tuning to the next station from the station list on the and by touching the symbols display.
- or -
Tuning to the next station from the station list by touching the stations shown on the left and right on the display.
- or -
Turning the rotary knob q to change the frequency upwards or downwards. As soon as a valid frequency is input, it is tuned to. Tuning to stations by scanning If you activate this function, each station found within the frequency range will be played for ap-
prox. 5 seconds. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Start scan. Each station within the frequency range is played for approx. 5 seconds. 4. Select Stop scan to tune to the scanned sta-
tion. Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memories Setting the preset memory There are six memory locations available in each of the preset memories. The preset memories for radio mode are:
In FM mode:
FM 1, FM 2, FM 3, BEST FM and MIXED. In AM mode:
AM 1, AM 2, AM 3 and MIXED. The PCM automatically fills the station buttons for the Best FM preset memory at regular in-
tervals with the stations with the strongest re-
ception. In contrast to all other preset memories, the MIXED preset memory can store stations from different modes. This means you can store stations from FM mode and AM mode as well as stations from TV mode here. TUNER 23 Storing via an automatic station search
(autostore) The automatic station search is only available for the preset memories FM 1, FM 2, FM 3 as well as AM 1, AM 2 and AM 3. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-
ed. 2. Set the preset memory if applicable
(> page 23). 3. Press and hold the Autostore menu item. The search is activated. It stores the six sta-
tions with the strongest reception and tunes to the strongest station. Traffic programme (TP) Various FM radio stations broadcast traffic mes-
sages in addition to their radio programmes. The broadcasting stations are responsible for the quality of these traffic messages. For that reason, no liability can be accepted for the completeness and correctness of the information. Traffic messages are part of the RDS signals and are not available everywhere. To find out more, please refer also to the sections Switching RDS on/off on page 25 and Displaying traffic mes-
sages (TMC) on page 109. Switching the traffic programme on 1. Press the m button repeatedly until 2. Select Traffic prog. to activate (
) or 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted.
) the function. deactivate (
When the traffic programme is switched on, the abbreviation TP (Traffic Programme) is dis-
played in the bottom line and you hear the traf-
fic messages regardless of the audio source that is currently active. Storing stations manually the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-
ed. 2. Tune to the station (> page 22). 3. Set the preset memory if applicable
(> page 23). 4. Press and hold the station button for a few sec-
onds. As soon as the station is stored on the station button, the station name or the station frequen-
cy is displayed on the button and you hear a signal tone. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-
ed. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Preset memory. The available preset memories are listed. 4. Select the preset memory you want. 5. Touch the m tab in the header again. If you briefly touch the preset memory dis-
played in the main menu, you will likewise switch to another preset memory. Choosing a station in the station list and storing it 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is displayed. 2. Select Station list. 3. Select the station entry you want by pressing and holding it for several seconds. The station buttons are displayed and the sta-
tion previously chosen is shown in the informa-
tion window. 4. To store the station on a station button, select the station button you want. The station list is displayed again. 24 TUNER Setting the Traffic prog. volume Making settings for radio mode The traffic programme volume refers to the vol-
ume at which the traffic programme announce-
ments are output. It specifies the minimum volume as a function of the volume of the audio source currently selected. 1. Press the b button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Traffic prog.. 4. Make the setting you want on the scale by touching the two symbols and
. Switching RDS on/off The PCM is capable of receiving RDS signals (RDS
= Radio Data System) in FM mode. It supports the following functions:
station name, programme type (PTY), traffic programme, radio text as well as detection of alternative frequencies.
(Radio stations transmit programmes with the same programme content on different frequen-
cies in different regions.) Switching regionalisation on/off When RDS (tracking of the alternative frequencies) is active, regionalisation can additionally be switched on or off. If stations have a station chain with varying region-
al programme contents, switching on regionalisa-
tion prevents switching between the different sta-
tions. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET FM. 4. Select Regional to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or You can switch tracking of these alternative fre-
quencies on or off in the Set menu. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of Switching RDS radio text on/off 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET FM. 4. Select RDS to activate (
the function.
) or deactivate (
) the same name in the header. 3. Select SET FM. 4. Select Radio text to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or TUNER 25 Choosing a PTY (programme type) filter RDS stations can broadcast the stations pro-
gramme type (PTY). The programme type allows stations to be classi-
fied based on their genre, for example pop, rock or news. If a programme type is selected, only stations that correspond to the selected programme type are displayed in the FM station list. You can select as many different programme types in a list as you wish. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET FM
> PTY filter. 4. Select the programme types you want for sort-
).
)
) all the programme types in the ing (
) or deselect those you wish to omit (
By selecting Activate all you can select (
or deselect (
list. Station strength: The station list is displayed sorted according to station strength. Sta-
tions with good reception are shown at the top of the list. Last stations: The station list shows the sta-
tions listened to for at least two minutes. The last station listened to is shown at the top of the list. Frequency: The station list is displayed sort-
ed according to the order of the stations in the frequency band. 5. Set the sorting option you want by selecting it. Setting sorting criteria for the FM station list The FM station list can be sorted according to var-
ious criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:
1. Press the m button repeatedly until FM is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET FM. 4. Select Sorting criteria. Various radio buttons are then available for you to select:
Alphabetical: The station list is sorted alpha-
betically. Genre (PTY): The station list is sorted ac-
cording to programme type (PTY). If a programme type is selected, only sta-
tions that correspond to the selected pro-
gramme type are displayed in the FM station list. Only after selecting Activate all in the PTY filter list are all stations that can be re-
ceived listed. 26 TUNER TV The standard TV on the PCM can receive non-en-
crypted terrestrial analogue and digital (DVB-T) programmes. Depending on the country and re-
ception area, only analogue, digital or a mixture of analogue and digital programmes may be availa-
ble. If a programme is simultaneously received in both analogue and digital forms, the TV tuner au-
tomatically selects the higher-quality of the two. In some areas, DVB-T programmes are also broad-
cast without picture content. These are character-
ised by an additional note symbol. The activation of the automatic hatchback as well as some other vehicle functions may spo-
radic cause temporary restrictions of the TV reception. WARNING!
Accident hazard. For your own safety, no TV picture or video text can be shown during driv-
ing for legal reasons. To receive a TV picture, the vehicle must be stopped. In some countries, the parking brake must also be engaged. Calling up the main menu for TV mode Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. To use TV mode, you must first tune to a TV sta-
tion. You can do this via a station search or using the TV menu. You can return from the TV picture of the cur-
rent station to the main menu for TV mode at any time by touching the display or pressing the Back button h. Tuning to TV stations Displaying the TV picture 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Touch the information area in the TV menu
(above the station buttons on the display). The TV picture of the TV station currently tuned to is shown. Tuning to stations using the station buttons Station buttons must already have TV stations stored before they can be used to tune to a sta-
tion. To find out more, please refer to the section Storing TV stations on page 28. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Briefly press the station button. The station is tuned to and its TV picture dis-
played. An information window appears for about 3 seconds. TUNER 27 Storing via an automatic station search The automatic station search is only available for the preset memories TV 1, TV 2 and TV 3. 1. Set TV mode. 2. If necessary, set the preset memory as fol-
lows:
a.Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. b.Select Preset memory. The available preset memories are listed. c.Select the preset memory you want. d.Touch the m tab in the header again. You can likewise change the preset memory by touching TV 1, etc. in the TV main menu. 3. The set preset memory now appears after the Autostore menu item. Select the menu item. The search starts. It stores the six pro-
grammes with the strongest reception and switches to the strongest programme. The digital programmes can also be selected using the EPG list. To find out more, please refer to the section Electronic Programme Guide on page 30. Storing TV stations Each of the preset memories, TV 1, TV 2, TV 3 and MIXED, has six memory locations available. In contrast to all other preset memories, the MIXED preset memory can store stations from dif-
ferent modes. Here, you can manually store sta-
tions from FM/AM mode as well as stations from TV mode. Storing stations manually 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Tune to a TV station (> page 27). 3. Press and hold the station button for a few sec-
onds. As soon as the TV station is stored on the sta-
tion button, the station name is shown on the button. Tuning to stations using the station list The station list provides details of the stations that can currently be received. Depending on the setting, the station list is ar-
ranged alphabetically, based on reception quality or based on the last stations. To find out more, please refer to the section Making settings for TV mode on page 31. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Select Station list. 3. Select the TV station or the DVB-T radio station you want. The station is tuned to and its TV picture dis-
played. 28 TUNER Showing the information window Press the right rotary knob r while in TV mode. The information window is called up together with the Station list menu item. While for digital programmes it shows details about the programme currently active, for ana-
logue programmes the information window only contains the name of the station plus the current time. The various information can, however, only be displayed if the relevant signal is being broad-
cast by the station. Video text Calling up video text 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Video text. The video text display appears. When called up for the first time, the programme page 100 is shown. Not all stations transmit a video text signal. Selecting a video text page 1. Touching the display opens a bar for entering the numbers directly. 2. Touch the appropriate digits on the display. After the third digit is entered, the video text search begins and the video text page is shown. The bar for entering numbers is hid-
den. If the Video text via TV function is activated, the video text picture is overlaid onto that of the TV programme. To find out more, please refer to the section Placing video text over the TV picture on page 30. Zooming into a video text page Call up an enlarged view of the upper half of the display by turning the right rotary knob q. Turn the knob again to switch to an enlarged view of the lower half of the display. Turn once more to return to the normal page view. TUNER 29 Placing video text over the TV picture If you activate this function, the video text page is overlaid transparently over the picture of the cur-
rent TV programme. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV. 4. Select Video text via TV to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Electronic Programme Guide The PCM features an Electronic Programme Guide, which contains various information about the digital programmes. The programmes are list-
ed in chronological order. Information (station, progress bar, end time and name of current programme) about programmes that are currently playing is shown at the top of the list. This is followed by information (station, start/
end time, names of following episodes) for the subsequent programmes. Please note that only digital channels transmit EPG data. This service is not available for ana-
logue channels. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select EPG list. The Electronic Programme Guide appears. Selecting an entry in the EPG list tunes to the corresponding programme and shows its TV picture. The menu item is greyed out if no EPG data is being received. You can also view the EPG data available for the current programme in the d menu by selecting the Details TV menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section Display-
ing detailed information about the active audio source on page 111. 30 TUNER Making settings for TV mode Setting sorting of the station list The TV station list can be sorted according to var-
ious criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:
Alphabetical: When sorted alphabetically, DVB-T TV stations are shown first, followed by analogue TV stations. DVB-T radio stations are at the bottom of the list. Station strength: When sorted based on sta-
tion strength, the stations are listed in de-
scending order of reception quality. Last stations: The station list shows the sta-
tions tuned to for at least two minutes. Sta-
tions that cannot be received are not dis-
played. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Sorting criteria. 4. Select the sorting you want. Setting the reception country Information about the available channel range is stored for the PCM in the country setting. If you take your vehicle abroad and wish to use the TV tuner, you should first set the correct entry in the country list. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Reception country. The country list is opened. It is sorted alpha-
betically. If the correct region is not available in the list, you can choose a setting with a symbol representing the correct TV stand-
ard. Setting TV picture parameters Setting the Brightness 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Picture param. - TV
> Brightness. 4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. A complete list of the reception countries can be found in the section Affiliated countries for TV tuner country settings on page 203. TUNER 31 Setting the Contrast Setting the Format 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Picture param. - TV
> Format. The following options are then available for you to select:
Automatic The picture format being received by the TV tuner is evaluated and its on-screen display is adjusted accordingly (automatic format switching between 4:3 and 16:9). 4:3 The picture is shown in such a way that no image contents are lost. 16:9 The picture is expanded to cover the entire width of the display. The picture is cropped at the upper and lower edges of the display. This setting is particularly useful for pro-
grammes that are broadcast with a black border at the upper and lower edges of the display. 4. Select the setting you want. With the Automatic setting, an ID broadcast by the station in question is analysed. Some stations do not broadcast this ID cor-
rectly, with the result that the PCM cannot im-
plement format settings automatically. Under certain circumstances, poor reception can lead to the ID not being analysed properly. In such cases, please set a fixed format (4:3 or 16:9). Setting the tint (special feature of NTSC stations) The Tint display option is additionally available when receiving signals from NTSC stations
(National Television System Committee: colour TV standard in the USA and Japan, amongst other countries). This allows colour distortions related to transmission to be corrected. 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Picture param. - TV
> Tint. 4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Picture param. - TV
> Contrast. 4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. Setting the Colour 1. Press the m button repeatedly until the TV mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET TV
> Picture param. - TV
> Colour. 4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and
. 32 TUNER Loading and ejecting CDs/DVDs ..................36 Calling up the main menu for CD/DVD mode ...........................................37 Selecting a CD/DVD....................................37 Selecting a track ........................................37 Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)..................37 Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode ........38 Setting the audio format for video DVD ........38 Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio) ................38 Naming a CD..............................................38 Skipping to the previous/next track..............39 Fast forward/reverse ..................................39 Repeating a track .......................................39 Switching the shuffle function on/off ............39 Starting/stopping scanning .........................39 Searching for music in MP3 mode
(full text search)..........................................39 iPod* ..........................................................40 Calling up the main menu for iPod mode.......40 Searching for music....................................40 Playlists .....................................................41 Track list ...................................................42 Skipping to the previous/next track..............42 Fast forward/reverse ..................................42 Repeating a track .......................................42 Switching the shuffle function on/off ............42 Adapting the volume for iPod mode..............42 DISC USB ............................................................ 43 Calling up the main menu for USB mode...... 44 Searching for a track ................................. 44 Track list................................................... 46 Skipping to the previous/next track............. 46 Fast forward/reverse ................................. 46 Repeating a track ...................................... 46 Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 46 Starting/stopping scanning......................... 46 Calling up an external audio source ............. 47 Activating the interface............................... 47 Adapting the volume for an external audio source ............................................. 47 External Bluetooth audio source.................. 48 Calling up an external Bluetooth audio source/starting playback............................ 48 Activating the interface............................... 48 Skipping a track ........................................ 49 Fast forward/reverse ................................. 49 Repeating a track ...................................... 49 Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 49 Starting/stopping scanning......................... 49 Bluetooth settings...................................... 49 Calling up Bluetooth settings .................... 49 Switching Bluetooth on/off ....................... 49 Adding a new Bluetooth device ................. 50 Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device......................... 50 Setting visibility ........................................ 50 Authorised Bluetooth devices .................. 50 DISC 33 Notes on copyright You are only permitted to create copies of CDs/
DVDs for your own private use. The copyright ex-
ceptions do not cover circulation of the duplicated CDs/DVDs to third parties. The music tracks that you can create for and play in MP3 mode are generally copyright-protected under the applicable international and national laws. In many countries, the reproduction of copy-
righted material is not permitted, even if only for personal use, without the express prior consent of the copyright holder. Please check the current copyright laws for your country and comply with them. These restrictions do not apply, for example, to your own compositions and re-
cordings or to recordings for which authorisation has been obtained from the copyright holder. The most current laws always apply!
Notes on the media supported To avoid problems when playing your CDs/DVDs, please note the following:
Permissible media:
CD-R and CD-RW (650 MB and 700 MB) DVD+R and DVD+RW DVD-R and DVD-RW Permissible file systems:
CD-ROM (Yellow Book)/ISO 9660 Level 1/
Joliet for CD (filenames max. 64 characters) Permissible file structures:
The maximum number of tracks per disc is 4,000. A disc may hold a maximum of 2,000 folders in total. Each folder in turn may contain a maximum of 1,000 tracks. The maximum directory depth is 11 levels. DISCCD audio/DVD-Audio/DVD-Video CAUTION Always touch the CD/DVD at the edges on-
ly. Never touch the side without writing and keep the CD/DVD clean. Never stick anything on the CD/DVD. Protect the CD/DVD against direct sunlight and from heat sources such as heaters, etc. Before playing the CD/DVD, it should be cleaned with a special, commercially avail-
able cleaning cloth, wiping from the centre outwards. Solvents such as petrol, thinners or other commercially available cleaning agents and anti-static sprays must not be used. Do not bend the CD/DVD. The system may not be able to play copy-
protected CDs/DVDs or CDs with CD-ROM sections that do not correspond to the audio CD standard. 34 DISC No warranty is accepted for:
poor quality user-burned CDs/DVDs, CDs of other formats, Mixed Mode CDs, CD-Extra CDs as well as multi-session CDs/DVDs. CDs/DVDs that have not been finalised cannot be played. Insertion of a non-standard CD/DVD format such as DVD-Plus (one side audio CD, the other side DVD) may lead to irreparable damage of the drive due to the greater thickness of the media. Supported audio formats The PCM supports the following audio formats:
MP3 *
(MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) WMA *
(Windows Media Audio) AAC-LC *(Low Complexity Advanced Audio Coding) WAVE file format *
DTS **
(Digital Theater Systems) Dolby Digital ***
Meridian Lossless Packing ****
*) No guarantee can be made that all MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV formats can be played back, due to the wide variety of different audio programmes
(encoders) available.
**) Manufactured under licence in accordance with US patents No. 5.451.942, 5.956.674, 5.974.380, 5.978.762, 6.487.535 and other patents issued and registered in the USA and inter-
nationally. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are reg-
istered trademarks and the DTS logos and the DTS symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. 1996-
2008 DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
***) The double D symbol is a legally protected trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
****) MLP LosslessTH is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Notes on DVD mode Video DVDs generally feature a regional code. In-
formation on this can usually be found either on the DVD itself or on the DVD sleeve. The CD/DVD drive of the PCM detects the respec-
tive regional code of the video DVD inserted. As per the Regional Protection Code, it allows you to change the regional code up to five times. Please contact your Porsche partner to find out how to change the regional code. You will find a list of regional codes in the section Regional codes for video DVDs on page 203. When playing video DVDs, only playback of the au-
dio information is supported. Some of the video DVDs you find in stores may not conform to the standards. You may experience sound or other playback problems with these DVDs. Discs, DVD authoring software, burning software and burners are widely available. Due to this wide variety, we cannot guarantee that the CD/DVD drive of the PCM will be able to play every user-
burned video DVD. DISC 35 Calling up the CD/DVD changer menu Briefly press the j button. The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed. A but-
ton is displayed for each compartment in the changer magazine. If there is a CD or DVD in the compartment, you will see the title of the CD/DVD on the button (if available). If the title of the CD/DVD is not available, the for-
mat of the disc (CD or DVD) is indicated instead. If a compartment is empty, empty is shown be-
side the compartment number on the display. Loading a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD changer Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. To allow for the fastest possible changes, you should load the magazine successively beginning with compartment 1. 1. Briefly press the j button. The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed. 2. Select an empty magazine compartment. You are then prompted to insert a disc. Loading and ejecting CDs/DVDs Loading a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD drive Insert the disc into the CD/DVD slot with the printed side facing upwards. Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. Ejecting a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD drive Briefly press the j button. The CD/DVD is stopped and ejected. The system automatically switches to the current audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have removed the CD/DVD from the magazine com-
partment. 36 DISC 3. Push the CD/DVD into the slot. The printed side of the CD/DVD must face up-
wards. Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. DISC flashes on the button. As soon as the CD/
DVD is detected, it is scanned and the current track is shown on the display. Loading all discs in a PCM with empty CD/DVD changer Press and hold thej button or any mag-
azine compartment for several seconds. All magazine compartments are moved into position one after the other and at each stage you are prompted to insert a CD/DVD. Ejecting a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD changer 1. Briefly press the j button. The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed. 2. Select the magazine compartment you want. The CD/DVD is stopped if necessary and eject-
ed. 3. Remove the CD/DVD. If you do not insert another CD/DVD in this magazine compartment, the CD/DVD in the next occupied compartment is played. If you do not remove the CD/DVD from the slot, the PCM will automatically retract it after a short while. Ejecting all discs in a PCM with CD/DVD changer Press and hold the j button or any mag-
azine compartment for several seconds. All discs are ejected in sequence. The system automatically switches to the current audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have removed the last CD/DVD from the magazine compartment. Calling up the main menu for CD/DVD mode Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. Selecting a CD/DVD 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Disc selection. A list of the available CDs/DVDs is opened. 3. Select the CD/DVD you want. Playback is started at the beginning of the disc. Selecting a track You can select a track directly using the track list. The track list shows the track numbers and, if available, the track names. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. 3. Select the track you want. Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD) If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/DVD, the track list shows the names of the root directories as well as the subdirectories. The following symbols are used in the track list to make it easier for you to navigate within the direc-
tory structure of the MP3 CD/DVD:
Subdirectory Selecting this list entry opens the correspond-
ing subdirectory and displays the directories and tracks it contains. Higher-level directory Selecting this list entry or pressing the h button displays the higher-level di-
rectory. Playlist Selecting this list entry allows you to play lists of tracks in m3u format you have created on your computer and burned to the CD/DVD. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. 3. Select the directory or playlist you want. 4. Select the track you want. DISC 37 Setting the audio format for video DVD 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select DVD audio format. A list of the available audio formats is opened. 4. Select the audio format you want. After selecting a new audio format from the list, playback is resumed at the same point in the current chapter if possible. If this is not possible, the current chapter is played once again from the beginning. All following tracks are also played with the newly set audio format. If this is not possible with a track, playback reverts to the originally set audio format. This format is then retained for the subsequent tracks. Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio) 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. 3. Select the first list entry with the higher-level directory symbol The list of audio groups is opened. 4. Select the audio group you want. 5. Select the track you want within the audio group. Naming a CD This function is only available for audio CDs and DTS-CDs without CD text. A maximum of 100 CDs can be named. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Name CD. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want for the CD. If the directory structure of the folders is very deep or the number of files is very large, it may not be possible to display all the folders or tracks. File formats that cannot be played will not be displayed. To find out more, please refer also to the sec-
tion Notes on the media supported on page 34. Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode When playing video DVDs, only playback of the au-
dio information is supported. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. 3. Select the chapter you want.
- or if you want to choose a chapter in another film title -
3 Select the first list entry with the higher-level directory symbol The list of video titles is opened. 4. Select the video title you want. 5. Select the chapter you want. 38 DISC Skipping to the previous/next track If the current track has been playing for longer than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes playback from the start of the current track. If the current track has not yet been playing for 10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start of the previous track. If you want to skip to the next track when a CD/
DVD is playing, briefly press the o button. If you want to skip back to the start of the track when a CD/DVD is playing, briefly press the p button. Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the o button or p button for a few seconds when a CD/DVD is playing until the position you want is reached. Repeating a track Activating this function repeats the current track or chapter (video DVD mode). Select Repeat while a CD/DVD is playing to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function.
- or to switch it off -
Press the p or o button. Switching the shuffle function on/off When you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. The current CD/DVD is then played in random order. Select Shuffle while a CD/DVD is playing to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Starting/stopping scanning When this function is activated, each track on the CD/DVD or each chapter on a video DVD is played for approx. 10 seconds. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Start scan to activate the function. 3. Select Stop scan to deactivate the function. The CD/DVD track that has started playing will continue to play. The function is automatically stopped as soon as a track is selected directly in the track list. Searching for music in MP3 mode
(full text search) The music search in MP3 mode is based on a full text search of the file names. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the DISC audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Full text search. The input menu is opened. The menu item is only available when the track list is available. 4. Enter at least three letters of the search term. 5. Call up the search results by selecting List. 6. Select the track you want in the result list. The track is played. DISC 39
*) iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. and is registered in the USA and in other countries.
**) Compatibility of later iPod models with the PCM cannot be guaranteed. Calling up the main menu for iPod mode Press the n button repeatedly until the iPod audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. If you encounter any problems it may be nec-
essary to update your iPods firmware. It is recommended not to leave an iPod in the vehicle for long periods of time as extreme ambient conditions (temperature, humidity) can occur in vehicles. The iPod charges during use. For proper operation of an iPod or iPhone on the PCM, including the charging function, both connectors must be attached to the media in-
terface. The iPod mode is only displayed if a corre-
sponding device is connected to the inter-
face. Searching for music You can search for specific tracks on your iPod. The following categories are available to you for this:
Artists Displays a list of all available artists. If you se-
lect an artist from the list, the number of tracks and albums available for the subsequent search is updated and displayed after the menu item. iPod jack iPod*
You can connect one of the following iPod models with your PCM via a jack in the centre console of your vehicle using the connecting cable supplied:
iPod 4th generation, iPod 5th generation (video), iPod nano, iPod nano 2nd generation as well as iPod mini, iPod photo, later iPod models**. 40 DISC Albums Displays a list of the available albums. If you have already selected an artist, only albums by that artist will be available for the subsequent search. If you select an album from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated. Track Displays a list of all tracks stored on the iPod. If you have already selected a category
(e.g. Artists), the list of tracks will have been automatically updated and only tracks by that artist will be available. Music genres The tracks stored on the iPod are generally as-
signed to a music genre (provided the Genre ID3 tag has been assigned). These music gen-
res can also be used as categories for a search. If you have selected a music genre, the artists, albums and tracks available for the subse-
quent search are updated. Once you select a category, higher-level catego-
ries are no longer available. After you select an artist, for example, the Music genres category can no longer be selected. Selecting Start playback ends the search and plays the tracks in accordance with your previous selection. Below is an example of how to perform a search for the tracks of a specific artist and album. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the iPod audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Find music in iPod mode. 3. Select Artists. A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored on the iPod is opened. 4. Select the artist you want in the list. 5. Select Albums. A list of all the albums by the selected artist stored on the iPod is opened. 6. Select the album you want in the list. The number of tracks on this album is now shown in brackets on the Track button. 7. Select Start playback. The tracks on the selected album are now played one after the other. The tracks from a music search are displayed in the track list. To find out more, please refer also to the section Track list on page 42. The iPod determines the sorting of the lists. Playlists Selecting this list entry allows you to play lists of tracks you have stored on your iPod. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the iPod audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Playlists. The menu is opened. 3. Select the playlist you want. The tracks in the list are played one after the other. After the last track is played, the playlist is automatically repeated. DISC 41 Track list If you have performed a music search or selected a playlist, the corresponding tracks are displayed in the track list. Fast forward/reverse Press the o button or p button when the iPod is playing until the position you want is reached. Adapting the volume for iPod mode You will only be able to access the SET DISC
/ AUX menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available. 1. Press the n button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET DISC / AUX
> Volume adaptation
> Volume iPod. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the or by turning q the symbols and right rotary knob. Repeating a track Activating this function repeats the current track. Select Repeat when the iPod is playing to ac-
tivate (
) or deactivate (
) the function.
- or to switch it off -
Press the p or o button. Switching the shuffle function on/off When you activate this function, the current track in the music selection is played to the end. All tracks in the current music selection are then played in random order. Select Shuffle when the iPod is playing to ac-
tivate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. The iPod determines the sorting of the lists. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the iPod audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. The menu is opened. 3. Select the track you want. The track is played. Skipping to the previous/next track If you want to skip to the next track when the iPod is playing, briefly press the o button. If you want to skip back to the start of the track when the iPod is playing, briefly press the p button. 42 DISC Notes on the media supported To avoid problems when playing your USB devic-
es, please note the following:
Permissible media:
USB mass storage device, USB MP3 player (to MTP standard) Permissible file systems:
USB devices with the file systems FAT 16 and FAT 32 are supported. Permissible USB standards:
USB devices that meet the USB 2.0 specifica-
tions are supported. Permissible file structures:
Up to 10,000 tracks are supported on the USB device. You can use it to:
play audio data from your USB stick
(permitted formats: MP3, WAV, WMA and AAC-
LC), download data from the Sport display as well as download data from the PCM logbook. You cannot connect USB devices that require the installation of special drivers. The use of a USB hub is not permitted. Compatibility with all memory sticks and MP3 players cannot be guaranteed due to the rap-
id rate at which USB media are developing. USB devices with increased power require-
ments (e.g. external hard drives) cannot be operated on the USB interface in some cir-
cumstances. It is recommended not to leave USB devices in the vehicle for long periods of time as ex-
treme ambient conditions (temperature, hu-
midity) can occur in vehicles. USB jack USB You can connect a USB memory stick or a USB MP3 player containing audio files to the USB inter-
face of the PCM in the centre console. DISC 43 The music search only works if metadata for the tracks (ID3 tags) is available. A database is created in the PCM for the mu-
sic search. This can take a few minutes. The tracks from a music search are compiled in a playlist named Tracks from music search under the Track list menu item. Searching for tracks by category You can compile the tracks you want using the fol-
lowing categories:
Artist Displays a list of all artists. If you select an art-
ist from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated. If you select All artists you can also search using the input menu. Album Displays a list of the available albums. If you have already selected a category
(e.g. Artists), only albums by that artist will be available for the subsequent search. If you select an album from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated. If you select All albums you can also search using the input menu. Track Displays a list of all tracks stored on the USB device. If you have already selected a category
(e.g. Artists), the list of tracks will have been automatically updated and only tracks by that artist will be available. If you select All tracks you can also search using the input menu. Music genres The tracks stored on the USB device are gen-
erally assigned to a music genre (provided the Genre ID3 tag has been assigned). These music genres can also be used as categories for a search. Calling up the main menu for USB mode Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. The USB mode is only displayed if a corre-
sponding device is connected to the inter-
face. The first time USB mode is activated, the au-
dio files in the USB memory are loaded. The menu cannot be used and the menu items are greyed out during this process. Playback be-
gins as soon as the first tracks are found on the USB device. Searching for a track You can search for specific tracks on your USB de-
vice. The following options are available to you for this:
search for tracks using categories
(Find music), search for similar tracks to the track currently playing using categories
(Play more from) and search for tracks using a Full text search. 44 DISC These categories can be used either individually or in succession for the search. The remaining number of entries is updated. In contrast to the music search in iPod mode, the categories can be set in any order. Selecting Start playback ends the search and plays the tracks in accordance with your previous selection. Below is an example of how to perform a search for tracks by a specific artist on a specific album. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Find music in USB mode. 3. Select Artists. A list of all available artists whose tracks are stored on the USB device is opened. Highlight the artist you want by selecting in the list. 4. Select the artist you want in the list. 5. Select Albums. A list of all albums by the selected artist stored on the USB device is opened. 6. Select the album you want in the list. The number of tracks on this album is now shown in brackets on the Track button. 7. Select Start playback. The tracks on the selected album are now played one after the other. Searching for similar tracks by category 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Play more from. You can now choose between the following cat-
egories:
Artist, Album and Genre. 4. Select the category you want. The corresponding tracks are played one after the other. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Full text search. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter at least three letters of the search term. 5. Call up the search results by selecting List. In the result list, symbols are used to distinguish between an artist, track or album:
Artist Album Track In some cases, no further tracks may be found for the selected category. 6. Select the artist/album/track you want in the result list. The selection is played. Searching for tracks using a full text search The full text search function gives you quick ac-
cess to specific tracks. It is suitable for the follow-
ing situations:
there is no metadata (ID3 tags) on your USB device, there are a large number of tracks stored on your USB device and a search using filters would produce very long result lists or you do not know the exact name of the track/
artist you want. DISC 45 Skipping to the previous/next track If the current track has been playing for longer than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes playback from the start of the current track. If the current track has not yet been playing for 10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start of the previous track. If you want to skip to the next track in USB mode, briefly press the o button. If you want to skip back to the start of the track in USB mode, briefly press the p button. Fast forward/reverse Press the o button or p button in USB mode un-
til the position you want is reached. Repeating a track Activating this function repeats the current track. Select Repeat in USB mode to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function.
- or to switch it off -
Press the p or o button. Switching the shuffle function on/off When you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. All tracks in the current music selection are then played in random order. Select Shuffle in USB mode to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. The shuffle function is automatically deactivated as soon as a new music search is started. Starting/stopping scanning When this function is activated, each track from the USB device or the current music selection is played for approx. 10 seconds. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Start scan to activate the function. 3. Select Stop scan to deactivate the function. The track on the USB device that has started playing continues to be played. The function is automatically stopped as soon as a track is selected directly in the track list or a mu-
sic search is performed. Track list The tracks and playlists stored on the USB device are displayed in alphabetical order in the track list. To find out more about using the track list, please refer to the section Selecting a track (MP3 CD/
DVD) on page 37. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the USB audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Track list. The menu is opened. 3. Select the track you want. The track is played.
- or -
Select the playlist and then the track you want. The track is played. If the directory structure of the folders is very deep or the number of files is very large, it may not be possible to display all of the fold-
ers or tracks. File formats that cannot be played will not be displayed. 46 DISC WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle. Operate the external audio source only when you are safely in control of your vehi-
cle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the external audio source while the vehicle is parked. Calling up an external audio source Press the n button repeatedly until the AUX audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. AUX jack External audio source You can use the AUX interface to connect an exter-
nal audio source that is operated on the source it-
self rather than on the PCM. Please refer to the op-
erating manual for the relevant device. Activating the interface To be able to select a connected external audio source with the n button, the interface must be activated in the SET menu. 1. Press the n button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET DISC / AUX. You will only be able to access the SET DISC /
AUX menu if there is at least one CD/DVD in-
serted or at least one audio source activated
(
) in the menu. 4. Select AUX to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Adapting the volume for an external audio source Volume control should mainly be performed on the external audio source to avoid large dif-
ferences in volume (particularly increases) when changing the audio source. Recommendation:
Set the maximum volume on the external audio source. Then set the volume you want on the PCM. You can also adapt the volume of the external audio source to the volume of the PCM. DISC 47 You will only be able to access the SET DISC
/ AUX menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available. 1. Press the n button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET DISC / AUX
> Volume adaptation
> Volume AUX. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the or by turning q the symbols and right rotary knob. External Bluetooth audio source You can also connect an external audio source that is partially operated on the source itself rath-
er than on the PCM via a Bluetooth connection. For the connection and operation of the exter-
nal Bluetooth audio source, the PCM also supports the A2DP/AVRCP profile. The extent to which the external Bluetooth audio source can be operated on the PCM de-
pends on the functions supported by the au-
dio source. Operation of the external Blue-
tooth audio source on the PCM is therefore restricted in some cases. In other cases, op-
eration on the PCM is not possible. The audio source is then operated on the connected de-
vice itself. Please refer to the operating man-
ual for the relevant device. WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle. Operate the external audio source only when you are safely in control of your vehi-
cle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the external audio source while the vehicle is parked. Calling up an external Bluetooth audio source/starting playback Press the n button repeatedly until the AUX BT audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. Playback starts automatically if this is support-
ed by the Bluetooth device. It may be neces-
sary to start playback manually on the Blue-
tooth device. The AUX BT mode is only displayed if a cor-
responding device is connected to the inter-
face. Activating the interface To use an external Bluetooth audio source, the AUX Bluetooth function must be activated in the SET DISC / AUX menu. 1. Press the n button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET DISC / AUX. You will only be able to access the SET DISC /
AUX menu if there is at least one CD/DVD in-
serted or at least one audio source activated
(
) in the menu. 4. Select AUX Bluetooth to activate (
) or
) the function. deactivate (
When you deactivate AUX Bluetooth, the Bluetooth devices are deleted from the list if necessary. 48 DISC With some devices, it may be necessary to set the volume on the device. Recommendation:
Set the required volume on the external Bluetooth audio source. Then set the volume you want on the PCM. The functions and displays depend on the ac-
tive Bluetooth device. Skipping a track If you want to skip to the next track, briefly press the o button. If you want to skip back to the start of the track/to the previous track, briefly press the p button. Fast forward/reverse Press the o button or p button in AUX BT mode until the position you want is reached. Repeating a track Activating this function repeats the current track. Select Repeat in Bluetooth AUX mode to ac-
tivate (
) or deactivate (
) the function.
- or to switch it off -
Press the p or o button. Switching the shuffle function on/off When you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. All tracks are then played in random order. Select Shuffle in Bluetooth AUX mode to ac-
tivate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Starting/stopping scanning When this function is activated, each track from the external audio source is played for approx. 10 seconds. 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the AUX BT audio source is highlighted in the bot-
tom line. 2. Select Start scan to activate the function. 3. Select Stop scan to deactivate the function. The track from the external audio source that has started playing will continue to play. Bluetooth settings Calling up Bluetooth settings 1. Press the n button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET DISC / AUX
> Bluetooth settings. You will only be able to access the SET DISC
/ AUX menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available. Switching Bluetooth on/off Switching Bluetooth on Select Switch on Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth off Select Switch off Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. DISC 49 Adding a new Bluetooth device For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. 1. Select New MP3 player in the Bluetooth settings. A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed. 2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device To find out more, please refer to the section Es-
tablishing a connection from an external Blue-
tooth device on page 69. Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section Set-
ting visibility on page 69. 50 DISC Authorised Bluetooth devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-
ised MP3 players
. Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices Select List of MP3 players in the Bluetooth settings. Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Connect. Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth device from the PCM 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Disconnect. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting settings. Yes. Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address as well as the supported services. DISC 51 Telephone settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) ...........66 Setting the ringtone type.............................66 Setting the ringtone volume.........................66 Setting the call volume................................66 Setting the microphone volume ...................66 Switching 3-way calling on/off .....................66 Bluetooth settings (Bluetooth mobile phone preparation)........................................67 Authorised Bluetooth devices ...................67 Adding a new Bluetooth device..................68 Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device..........................69 Setting visibility ..........................................69 Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) ...........70 Setting the memory for the phonebook ........70 Setting sorting ...........................................70 Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook ...........................................70 Transferring the phonebook...........................71 Transferring the phonebook entries manually .........................................71 Deleting the phonebook ..............................71 Operating the PCM telephone ...................72 Inserting the SIM card in the PCM ................72 Entering the PIN .........................................73 Conducting calls.........................................73 Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone ...............................73 Accepting a call .........................................74 Ending a call ..............................................74 Rejecting a call...........................................75 Dialling a number........................................75 Using the quick dial (redial) function .............75 Using the direct dial function .......................75 Holding a call .............................................76 PCM phonebook .........................................76 List of previous calls...................................78 List of received calls...................................79 Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................80 Establishing an additional call ......................81 Call waiting ................................................81 Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........82 Using supplementary services .....................83 Making an emergency call...........................83 PHONE Bluetooth .................................................54 Prerequisites for the mobile phone ..............55 Hands-free quality.......................................55 Interruptions to the connection while driving .55 Switching Bluetooth on/off........................56 Operating the Bluetooth hands-free unit
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) ....56 Authorising a mobile phone .........................56 Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device..........................57 Conducting calls.........................................58 Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone ...............................58 Accepting a call .........................................58 Ending a call ..............................................59 Rejecting a call...........................................59 Dialling a number .......................................60 Using the quick dial (redial) function .............60 Using the direct dial function .......................60 Holding a call .............................................60 Phonebook ................................................60 List of previous calls...................................61 List of received calls...................................62 Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................63 Establishing an additional call ......................63 Call waiting ................................................64 Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........65 Speed dialling ............................................65 52 PHONE Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only)..............................83 Reading a text message ............................84 Replying to a text message .........................84 Creating and sending a new text message ...85 Forwarding a text message.........................87 Deleting a text message ............................87 Reading a vCard.........................................87 Accepting vCards .......................................88 Editing vCard details...................................88 Discarding (deleting) vCards........................89 Numbers in text messages..........................89 Displaying the complete text .......................90 Creating a template....................................90 Telephone settings
(PCM telephone) ...........................................91 Switching the PCM telephone on/off ............91 Setting ringtones........................................91 Selecting a network....................................91 Displaying the IMEI .....................................92 Switching 3-way calling on/off .....................92 SIM settings ..............................................92 Call settings
(PCM telephone) ...........................................93 Activating call forwarding ............................93 Switching the Call waiting function on/off...94 Switching the Redial function on/off...........95 Setting transfer of your own number............95 Setting automatic call answering .................95 Bluetooth settings
(PCM telephone)............................................95 Authorised Bluetooth devices ...................95 Adding a new Bluetooth device..................97 Setting visibility .........................................98 Finding the cordless handset .......................98 Phonebook settings ......................................98 Setting the memory for the phonebook ........98 Setting sorting ...........................................99 Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook ...........................................99 Transferring the phonebook ......................100 Deleting the phonebook ............................100 Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone)..........................................100 Changing the number of the SMS service centre ..................................100 Switching the SMS signal tone on/off.........100 Cordless handset........................................101 Switching the cordless handset on/off .......101 Charging the cordless handset ..................101 General operation.....................................101 Accepting a call........................................102 Ending a call ............................................102 Rejecting a call.........................................102 Dialling a number......................................102 Temporarily muting the handset microphone .................................102 Establishing an additional call ....................102 Call waiting (swapping) and conference ......103 Phonebook...............................................104 Text messages (SMS) ...............................105 Settings...................................................107 PHONE 53 WARNING!
Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-
volving explosives. Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-
ple. They can interfere with technical equip-
ment. Please heed appropriate warnings. Observe statutory regulations and local re-
strictions when using the telephone. PHONE The PCM can be equipped with an integrated car phone (PCM telephone) as an optional accessory. This car phone (PCM telephone) is a quadband GSM radio telephone (GSM 850/900/1800/
1900) with hands-free unit and a cordless hand-
set. It conforms to the GSM standard (Global Sys-
tem for Mobile communication) currently imple-
mented in more than 100 countries. For information on the current GSM coverage and planned expansion of the coverage areas of GSM networks, contact your network provider. Your PCM also offers a facility for the connection, operation and hands-free operation of an external telephone (mobile phone) via a Bluetooth con-
nection. An alternative equipment version (Bluetooth mo-
bile phone preparation) does not include a PCM telephone, but does still allow you to use the PCM as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth mobile phones. A list of selected compatible mobile telephones is available on the Internet at http://www.porsche.com. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a system for establishing radio con-
nections between electronic devices within a max-
imum range of 10 metres (approx. 33 feet). Bluetooth allows you to use your mobile phone via the PCM. You can accept, make and end calls. You use your vehicles audio system for hands-free operation and have access to the contents of your phonebook. Access to the phonebook depends on the range of functions supported by the mobile phone used. The connection is established in different ways de-
pending on the telephone version in your PCM:
In the case of a PCM with Bluetooth mobile phone preparation, connection takes place us-
ing the Hands-Free Profile. When connecting using the Hands-Free Profile, the PCM simply serves as a Bluetooth hands-free unit for the external telephone. The SIM card of the external telephone cannot be accessed (e.g. to write a text message) and the range of functions is restricted accordingly
(depending on the mobile phone used). 54 PHONE In the case of a PCM with PCM telephone, connection takes place using the SIM Access Profile if this profile is supported by the mo-
bile phone used. When connecting using the SIM Access Profile, the SIM card of the mobile phone is used for operation of the PCM tele-
phone. The data on the SIM card (phonebook entries and text messages) is read out by the PCM and is available for use on the PCM. The range of functions for a connection using the SIM Access Profile is largely the same as the function of the PCM telephone with SIM card inserted. If the mobile phone does not support the SIM Access Profile, connection takes place using the Hands-Free Profile. With mobile phones that support both profiles, it is possible to switch between the connection types. The option of connection using the SIM Access Profile is not available on all mobile phones and must also be activated on the de-
vice for some mobile phones. In some countries there may be limitations on the use of devices with Bluetooth. Please contact the local authorities for further infor-
mation. Prerequisites for the mobile phone Not all mobile phones are equally suitable for mak-
ing and receiving calls via the Bluetooth interface of the PCM. You need a mobile phone that supports Blue-
tooth. The mobile phone must support the Hands-
Free Profile 1.0 or higher. The mobile phone must be switched on and Bluetooth must be activated. On some mobile phones, the device must also be rendered visible to other devices with Bluetooth. Further information on the settings on your mobile phone can be found in the manufacturers operat-
ing instructions. Some mobile phones have special character-
istics when it comes to Bluetooth or do not fully support Bluetooth. Contact your mobile phone retailer and, if applicable, download the latest software onto your mobile phone. Hands-free quality The hands-free quality can be impaired by having the fan on, windows open or the top down, wind and rolling noise, mobile phone having a poor network connec-
tion, vehicle travelling at high speed. Interruptions to the connection while driving Interruptions to the connection may occur if:
there is inadequate GSM coverage in certain regions, you are switching from one GSM transmitting/
receiving station (GSM cell) to another and there is no voice channel available in this cell, you are using a SIM card that is not compatible with the available network, you are using two SIM cards and the mobile phone is simultaneously logged into the net-
work with the second SIM card. PHONE 55 Switching Bluetooth on/off Switching Bluetooth on 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Bluetooth settings. 4. Select Switch on Bluetooth. Switching Bluetooth off 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE.
> Bluetooth settings. 4. Select Switch off Bluetooth. Operating the Bluetooth hands-
free unit
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) The Bluetooth hands-free unit allows you to use the PCM as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth mo-
bile phones. Please note that your mobile phone must sup-
port the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile for use with the Bluetooth hands-free unit. Authorising a mobile phone Using the Find telephone function you can have the PCM search for and authorise your mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the PCM display for this. For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. Further details can be found in the operating man-
ual for your mobile phone. 56 PHONE With some mobile phones, the connection re-
quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-
book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phones list of devic-
es. The connection will then be established automatically in the future, without the need for further checks. Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone. To find out more, please refer also to the sections Authorised Bluetooth devices on page 95 and Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 97. Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device If the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also start the authorisation from the mobile phone. 1. If another mobile phone is connected with the PCM, switch off Bluetooth on the connected mobile phone to disconnect the connection with the PCM. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Find telephone. A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed. 3. Select the device you want in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed, which you must enter on your mobile phone. 4. Enter the displayed Bluetooth code on the mobile phone. Successful authorisation of the device is shown on the display and the connection is es-
tablished. 2. Press the c button. 3. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. The PCM is now visible for external devices. Please ensure that the Bluetooth visibility of the PCM is activated. To find out more, please refer to the section Setting visibility on page 69. 4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio ac-
cessories or devices that support Bluetooth. Refer to the manufacturers operating instruc-
tions to find out how to do this. 5. Select the device PCM from the mobile phones search results and establish a connec-
tion. Refer to the manufacturers operating instruc-
tions to find out how to do this. 6. A request appears on the PCM display. Select Accept. 7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit Bluetooth code of your choice and confirm with OK. PHONE 57 Conducting calls There is a hands-free microphone in the roof con-
trol console of the vehicle. This means that you can conduct all telephone calls without using a handset. You control the volume using the left rotary knob t. If there is a mobile phone connected to the PCM using the Hands-Free Profile, the call is normally conducted using the hands-free unit. It can, how-
ever, be transferred to the mobile phone by select-
ing the Private function. Select Private during the call to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the Private function. Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone Select Mute microphone during a call to acti-
vate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. The microphone can also be muted by:
briefly pressing u the left rotary knob
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) pressing the left roller on the multi-function steering wheel. Accepting a call As soon as a call comes in, the current audio source is muted and the selected ringtone is played. In addition, an appropriate menu is tempo-
rarily displayed or an appropriate message is shown in the bottom line. If available, the telephone number and name of the caller are displayed. 8. Enter the same Bluetooth code on your mo-
bile phone. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. 9. With many mobile phones, the connection with the PCM must be explicitly established from the mobile phone following authorisation. Fur-
ther details can be found in the operating man-
ual for your mobile phone. With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth code must be directly provided by the mobile phone during the connection request. If this is the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK. You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM display where you must enter the same code and confirm it. 58 PHONE You can accept the incoming call in a number of ways:
Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting Answer on the display.
- or -
Pressing the Lift handset button l on the ex-
ternal mobile phone.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the Lift handset button l on the multi-function steering wheel. Ending a call You can end an active call by:
Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting End call in the call menu.
- or -
Pressing the End call button k on the exter-
nal mobile phone.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the End call button k on the multi-
function steering wheel. Rejecting a call You can reject an incoming call by:
Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting Reject in the call menu.
- or -
Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u.
- or -
Pressing the End call button k on the exter-
nal mobile phone.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the End call button k on the multi-
function steering wheel. PHONE 59 Using the quick dial (redial) function Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a list of previous calls. 1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM. 2. Select the person you want to talk to. 3. Select Call number or press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.
- or -
Select the first list entry, Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers opens. 4. Enter the telephone number you want. 5. Select Call number. Using the direct dial function If a telephone number is displayed in a menu and is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if you press the Lift handset button l on the PCM
- or -
touch the displayed number for at least one second. Holding a call You can hold an active call by pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM. The menu items New call, Take call and End call are then available for you to select. To continue the call, press the Lift handset but-
ton l on the PCM again. Phonebook After a Bluetooth connection has been estab-
lished between the PCM and the mobile phone, the PCM attempts to transfer the phonebook data from the mobile phone. You can prevent this auto-
matic phonebook transfer by deactivating the Au-
to update function. To find out more, please refer to the section Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook on page 70. Displaying the phonebook 1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears. 2. Select Phonebook. The phonebook is opened. Dialling a number 1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears. 2. Select Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The input field for the telephone number is blank. 3. Select the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other. 4. Select Call number. The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed. Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code. 60 PHONE Calling a phonebook entry 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. If there is more than one number stored for this entry, select the number you want. 5. Select Call number. The number you want is dialled. Sending a vCard You can send phonebook entries directly as vCards. A vCard is an electronic visiting card that a recipient can accept directly into his or her phonebook. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. Select Send vCard. The list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devic-
es. To do this, press New data device (see also the section Adding a new Bluetooth de-
vice on page 97). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-
taining the devices found is displayed. Once you have selected a device in this list, a con-
nection is established and the vCard is sent. List of previous calls When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth connection, the mobile phones call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-
nection has been established. The last number di-
alled appears at the top of the list. The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones. If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the person called is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. The list of previous calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. Calling a number from the list of previous calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Call number. Deleting a number from the list of previous calls Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete the entries on your mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Delete. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The number is deleted from the list. PHONE 61 If the date and time information for the individ-
ual calls is not transferred from the mobile phone, the list begins with the unanswered calls. These are then followed by the accept-
ed calls. If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the caller is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list Calling a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number or name you want. 4. If there is more than one telephone number stored for a name, select the number you want. 5. Select Call number. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. The list of received calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. It contains both accepted and missed calls. Deleting a number from the list of received calls Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Delete. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. 6. The number is deleted from the list. Adding to a number from the list of previous calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Add to number. The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing. 5. Make the change you want. 6. Select Call number. The telephone number stored in the list is not changed. List of received calls When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth connection, the mobile phones call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-
nection has been established. The last call re-
ceived appears at the top of the list. The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones. 62 PHONE Adding to a number from the list of received calls Combining DTMF tones with a telephone number 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Add to number. The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing. 5. Make the change you want. 6. Select Call number. The telephone number stored in the list is not changed. Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be sent once a telephone connection has been estab-
lished. You need this function to communicate with touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in remotely to your answering machine). Touch tone dialling 1. Select Dial number in the call menu. The numerical input menu is opened. 2. Enter the digits you want. Each digit is immediately transmitted as a DTMF tone. You can use the + and w characters in the numer-
ical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with the entry of a telephone number.
+
w p The DTMF dialling digits are appended to the digits of the telephone number without any breaks. To enter the + character, touch and hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone in-
put menu. The digits of the telephone number are di-
alled first. As soon as the connection to the telephone number dialled has been es-
tablished, the DTMF dialling digits must be confirmed again. To enter the w character, touch and hold the * symbol in the telephone input menu. The digits of the telephone number are di-
alled first. The PCM then waits until the connection has been established before dialling the DTMF dialling digits.
>>>
The p character cannot be entered in the telephone input menu. It is, howev-
er, recognised by the PCM if it is stored in a telephone number on the SIM card, for example. In this case, the behaviour of the PCM is the same as the behaviour for + described above. Establishing an additional call You can establish an additional call while there is another call active. Some mobile phones do not support making or accepting a second call. In this case, the New call menu item is greyed out during an active call. PHONE 63 Call waiting The Call waiting function is only available if sup-
ported by the network provider and by the mobile phone. The Call waiting function must also be activated in the call settings of the mobile phone. To find out more, please refer also to the section Call waiting
(swapping) and conference on page 65. Rejecting a waiting call If you receive another call while there is already one active, you will hear a call waiting tone. The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a message appears in the bottom line. Select Reject. The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a busy signal. If the callers telephone number is transmitted, the number or name appears in the Received calls list. Accepting a waiting call Select Answer. The waiting call is accepted and activated. The previously active call is put on hold. You then have the option to switch between the two calls or to establish a conference with both callers. To find out more, please refer to the section Call waiting (swapping) and confer-
ence. The PCM will not accept a third incoming call. The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to the mailbox. Ending a connected call Select End connected call. The currently active call is ended and the first call that is on hold is activated again. 1. Select New call in the call menu. 2. You then have the following options for enter-
ing the telephone number:
Dial number:
The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. Please refer to the section Dialling a number on page 60. Phonebook:
You can insert a number stored in the phone-
book. To find out more, please refer to the section Calling a phonebook entry on page 61. Previous calls:
You can insert a telephone number from the list of previous calls. To find out more, please refer to the section Calling a number from the list of previous calls on page 61. Received calls:
You can insert a telephone number from the list of received calls. To find out more, please refer to the section Calling a number from the list of received calls on page 62. The original call is held while the new connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or establish a conference call. To find out more, please refer to the section Call waiting (swapping) and confer-
ence on page 65. 64 PHONE Swapping between the calls (call waiting) 1. Select Swap. The system swaps to the other call. The previ-
ously active call is put on hold. 2. Select Swap again to return to the call on hold. 3. To end one of the two calls, select End call 1 or End call 2.
- or -
Select End all to end both calls. Conferencing the two calls 1. Select Conference. Both calls are activated and connected so that all parties can speak to each other. 2. To end one of the two calls, select End call 1 or End call 2.
- or -
Select End all to end the conference. Call waiting (swapping) and conference The Call waiting & conf. function is only available if supported by the network provider and by the mobile phone. When using the Bluetooth hands-free unit, this function is only available for a limited selection of devices. A prerequisite for this function is that there are two calls, one of which is active and one of which is on hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to the sections Establishing an additional call on page 63 and Accepting a waiting call. Select Call waiting & conf.. You now have a number of options:
Speed dialling Speed dialling is a frequently used function in the US market, which allows dialling without having to enter the complete telephone number. Instead, you can enter the number of a memory lo-
cation on the SIM card followed by the # charac-
ter to dial the corresponding telephone number. The speed dialling function is only available if supported by your mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears. 2. Select Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. 3. Select the individual digits of the memory loca-
tion on the SIM card one after the other. 4. Select the # character. 5. Select Call number. The corresponding telephone number is insert-
ed and dialled. The call menu is displayed. PHONE 65 Setting the ringtone volume 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of Setting the microphone volume 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Telephone settings
> Ringtone volume. the same name in the header. 3. Select Telephone settings
> Mic volume. 4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-
bols and
. 4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-
bols and
. The implementation of audio transmission via Bluetooth often depends on the specific mo-
bile phone implementation. If the volume in the vehicle or for the called party is insuffi-
cient, it can be readjusted in the PCM. Setting the call volume 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Telephone settings
> Call volume. 4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-
bols and
. Switching 3-way calling on/off Problems may occur with 3-way calling on the PCM as these functions are not correctly support-
ed by all mobile phones and telephone networks
(in particular CDMA networks). It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched off in such cases in order to ensure reliable tele-
phone operation. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Telephone settings. 4. Select 3-way calling to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Telephone settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) Setting the ringtone type 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Telephone settings
> Ringtone type. A list of the available ringtones is displayed. 4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it. After a ringtone is selected, it is played back again. 5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if nec-
essary by turning the left rotary knob t. The volume level set in this way is saved when you exit the menu. If the connected mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth (inband ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed out and the ringtone must be set on the mo-
bile phone. 66 PHONE Bluetooth settings (Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) Authorised Bluetooth devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains:
mobile phones MP3 players data devices as well as
.
, Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of es. the same name in the header. 3. Select Bluetooth settings
> Device list. The list is opened. Devices that can be connected with the PCM using different profiles appear only once in the list. The symbol used always corre-
sponds to the main application. Mobile phones that can also be used as MP3 play-
ers or data devices appear in this list with the telephone symbol. Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Connect. Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring a vCard. Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth device from the PCM 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Disconnect. es. Yes. es. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. PHONE 67 Adding a new Bluetooth device For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.
> Select Bluetooth settings.
> New device. A search is started and a list of the devic-
es found is displayed. 3. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. 4. The connection is automatically established by the PCM. With some mobile phones, the connection re-
quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-
book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phones list of devic-
es. The connection will then be established automatically in the future, without the need for further checks. It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth device to be authorised. If the list of authorised Bluetooth devices is full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first de-
lete a device from the list. An appropriate message will be displayed. To find out more, please refer to the section Deleting an au-
thorised Bluetooth device from the list on page 67. Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address, the connection quality as well as the supported services. 68 PHONE Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device If the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also start the authorisation from the mobile phone. 1. If another mobile phone is connected with the PCM, switch off Bluetooth on the connected mobile phone to disconnect the connection with the PCM. 2. Press the c button. 3. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. The PCM is now visible for external devices. Please ensure that the Bluetooth visibility of the PCM is activated. To find out more, please see the following section. 4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio ac-
cessories or devices that support Bluetooth. Refer to the manufacturers operating instruc-
tions to find out how to do this. 5. Select the device PCM from the mobile phones search results and establish a connec-
tion. Refer to the manufacturers operating instruc-
tions to find out how to do this. 6. A request appears on the PCM display. Select Accept. 7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit Bluetooth code of your choice and confirm with OK. 8. Enter the same Bluetooth code on your mo-
bile phone. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. 9. With many mobile phones, the connection with the PCM must be explicitly established from the mobile phone following authorisation. Fur-
ther details can be found in the operating man-
ual for your mobile phone. Setting visibility To ensure that your PCM can be found by other de-
vices via the Bluetooth interface, it must be vis-
ible (=recognisable) for other devices during the search. To prevent further unwanted connection requests, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Bluetooth settings. 4. Select PCM visible to activate (
deactivate (
) visibility of the PCM.
) or With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth code must be directly provided by the mobile phone during the connection request. If this is the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK. You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM display where you must enter the same code and confirm it. PHONE 69 Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth mobile phone preparation) Setting the memory for the phonebook You can set which phonebook entries should be shown in the PCM phonebook display:
phonebook entries on the SIM card and/or phonebook entries in the telephones memory. This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the PCM to your list in the mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Phonebook settings
> Phonebook memory. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting it. Setting sorting You can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and call lists to the display on your mobile phone. You have the following options for sorting the phonebook:
Standard The phonebook is sorted by surname. Alternative The phonebook is sorted by first name. You have the following options for sorting the call lists:
Standard The call lists are sorted in the same order in which the entries were transferred from the mobile phone. Alternative The order of the entries transferred from the mobile phone is reversed. This option supports some mobile phones that transfer the oldest entries first. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Phonebook settings
> Sorting. Setting sorting of the phonebook 4. Select Phonebook. 5. Select the sorting you want. Setting sorting of the call lists 4 Select Call lists. 5. Select the sorting you want. Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook If the Auto update function is activated, the phonebook of a mobile phone is transferred as soon as the PCM is connected to this mobile phone. As soon as the transfer is complete, the phone-
book stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook from the mobile phone. If the Auto update function is deactivated, the data will no longer be updated. 70 PHONE 6. Press the c button. 7. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 8. Select Phonebook settings. 9. Select Auto update to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Your phonebook data can then only be ac-
cessed when the corresponding mobile phone is connected to the PCM. Transferring the phonebook This function transfers the phonebook of the con-
nected mobile phone into the PCM again. The phonebook stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook from the mobile phone once transfer is complete. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Transfer phonebook. Transferring the phonebook entries manually Some mobile phones do not support automatic phonebook transfer. In these cases, you can load entries from your mobile phones phonebook into the PCM phonebook manually. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Transfer phonebook. 4. You can now choose whether to add to the phonebook or completely replace it. Select the function you want. 5. Select the entries you want from your mobile phone and transfer them to the PCM via Blue-
tooth. The PCM counts the entries already trans-
ferred. 6. When transfer is complete, select Ready. The transferred entries are now available to you in the PCM phonebook. Deleting the phonebook The copy of the phonebook transferred to the PCM can be deleted again. Your mobile phones phonebook remains un-
changed. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Delete phonebook. PHONE 71 Operating the PCM telephone A SIM card is required if you want to use the inter-
nal PCM telephone in telephone mode. You can insert the SIM card in the slot provided under the display or connect a suitable mobile phone to the PCM via Bluetooth. To find out more, please refer to the sections Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM on page 96 and Adding a new Blue-
tooth device on page 97. Please note that your mobile phone must sup-
port the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile or the Bluetooth SIM Access Profile for use with the PCM telephone. The use of twin SIM cards, for example in the mobile phone and the internal PCM telephone
(both cards active at the same time), may im-
pair the telephone functions. For more information on this, contact your network provider. If there is no SIM card inserted in the slot, the PCM automatically attempts to establish a Bluetooth connection with a mobile phone. However, this is only possible if you have activated Bluetooth on the PCM and on the mobile phone and authorised at least one mobile phone on the PCM. If you have not yet authorised a mobile phone on the PCM, you can select Find telephone to have the PCM search for and authorise your mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the display. You can find more information in the sections Au-
thorised Bluetooth devices on page 95 and Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 97. Inserting the SIM card in the PCM Push the SIM card (SIM = Subscriber Identifica-
tion Module) into the slot provided until it en-
gages. To remove the SIM card, press the card into the slot again until it stops. Insert the SIM card so that the metal contacts are on the underside. The slanted corner of the SIM card must be on the rear left. 72 PHONE Entering the PIN As soon as you have switched on the telephone and inserted the SIM card, you are prompted to enter the PIN (PIN = Personal Identification Number). You will find the PIN in the documentation you re-
ceived from your network provider. 1. Enter the PIN by selecting the keys on the key-
pad shown. The numbers entered will be shown as aster-
isks in the input field. 2. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the wrong PIN three times in a row. To unblock the card, you must enter the PUK (Pin Unblocking Key). Follow the instructions on the PCM dis-
play to do this. The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the wrong PUK ten times in a row. This block can only be removed by the network provider. You can deactivate the PIN prompt after the de-
vice is switched on. To find out more, please refer to the sections Switching the PIN prompt on or off on page 93 and Using a stored PIN on page 93. Conducting calls There is a hands-free microphone in the roof con-
trol console of the vehicle. This means that you can conduct all telephone calls without using a handset. You control the volume using the left rotary knob t. Conducting a call using a headset 1. Select Hands-free in the call menu to switch to hands-free mode. 2. Select Headset in the call menu to terminate hands-free mode. The call is transferred back to the headset. The call can only be conducted using a head-
set if it has previously been connected with the PCM via Bluetooth. To find out more, please refer to the sections Authorised Bluetooth devices on page 95 and Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 97. Conducting a call using the cordless handset 1. Select Hands-free in the call menu to switch to hands-free mode. 2. Press the Lift handset button on the handset to terminate hands-free mode. The call is trans-
ferred back to the handset. To find out more, please refer to the section Cordless handset on page 101. Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone Select Mute microphone during the call to
) the function.
) or deactivate (
activate (
The microphone can also be muted by:
briefly pressing u the left rotary knob
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) pressing the left roller on the multi-function steering wheel. PHONE 73
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the Lift handset button l on the multi-function steering wheel.
- or - (with handset if available) Pressing the Lift handset button handset. on the
- or -
Removing the handset from the charging cra-
dle. Ending a call You can end an active call by:
Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting End call in the call menu.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the End call button k on the multi-
function steering wheel. Accepting a call As soon as a call comes in, an appropriate menu is temporarily displayed or an appropriate mes-
sage shown in the bottom line. If available, the telephone number and name of the caller are displayed. You can accept the incoming call in a number of ways:
Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting Answer on the display.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. 74 PHONE
- or - (with handset if available) Pressing the End call button set. on the hand-
- or -
Placing the handset in the charging cradle (if the call is on the handset). Rejecting a call You can reject an incoming call by:
Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
Selecting Reject in the call menu.
- or -
Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u.
- or -
Selecting the menu item in the instrument clus-
ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) Pressing the End call button k on the multi-
function steering wheel.
- or - (with handset if available) Pressing the End call button set. on the hand-
Dialling a number 1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears. 2. Select Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The input field for the telephone number is blank. 3. Select the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other. 4. Select Call number. The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed. Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code. Using the quick dial (redial) function Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a list of previous calls. 1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM. 2. Select the person you want to talk to. 3. Select Call number or press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.
- or -
Select the first list entry, Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers opens. 4. Enter the telephone number you want. 5. Select Call number. Using the direct dial function If a telephone number is displayed in a menu and is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if you press the Lift handset button l on the PCM
- or -
touch the displayed number for at least one second. PHONE 75 Creating and storing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select New entry at the end of the list. 4. Select Name. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-
vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing OK. 6. Select Number. 7. Enter the number you want by selecting the in-
dividual digits in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing OK. 8. Select Store entry. The entry is stored on the SIM card. The telephone number must be entered with a dialling code (there are a few exceptions to this). For overseas telephone calls you must also specify the international dialling code. Example: For Germany, you must enter
+4917XXX instead of 017XXX if you will be di-
alling the number from outside the country. Displaying the phonebook 1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears. 2. Select Phonebook. The phonebook is opened. If no entries have been stored in it yet, List empty is displayed. If entries have already been stored, these are shown in a list. Calling a phonebook entry 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. If there is more than one number stored for this entry, select the number you want. 5. Select Call number. The number you want is dialled. Holding a call You can hold an active call by pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM. The menu items New call, Take call and End call are then available for you to select. To continue the call, press the Lift handset but-
ton l on the PCM again. PCM phonebook After you insert a SIM card, the phonebook entries are transferred from the SIM card to the PCM. After a Bluetooth connection has been estab-
lished between the PCM and the mobile phone, the PCM also attempts to transfer the phonebook data from the mobile phone. You can prevent this automatic phonebook transfer by deactivating the Auto update function. To find out more, please refer to the section Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook on page 70. 76 PHONE Editing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted) Deleting the contents of the SIM card
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. Select Edit. 5. Select the menu item to be edited and make the change you want in the relevant input menu. 6. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. 7. Select Store entry. The entry is stored on the SIM card. Deleting a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. Select Delete. A prompt is displayed asking whether the entry selected should actually be deleted. 5. Confirm the prompt by selecting Yes. The phonebook entry is deleted. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select any phonebook entry. 4. Select Delete. 5. Select Delete SIM card. 6. Confirm the prompt which then appears with Delete all. Sending a vCard You can send phonebook entries directly as vCards. A vCard is an electronic visiting card that a recipient can accept directly into his or her phonebook. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select the phonebook entry you want. 4. Select Send vCard. 5. Select one of the two following transfer meth-
ods:
As SMS To Bluetooth 6. If you choose As SMS, you must enter the tel-
ephone number of the recipient in the input menu that appears. You can also select the number from the phonebook or call lists by selecting the corre-
sponding menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section Creating and sending a new text message on page 85.
>>>
If you choose To Bluetooth, the list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is dis-
played. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press New data device (see also the section Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 97). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-
taining the devices found is displayed. Once you have selected a device in this list, a con-
nection is established and the vCard is sent. You can also send a destination entry from the personal destination memory of your naviga-
tion system as a vCard. To find out more about this, please refer to the section Send-
ing a destination on page 149. PHONE 77 Calling a number from the list of previous calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Call number. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Delete. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The number is deleted from the list. Storing a number from the list of previous calls in the phonebook Sending a message to a number from the list of previous calls This function is only available when there is a SIM card inserted. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Store number. 5. Enter the name corresponding to the number and store the entry. To find out more, please refer to the section PCM phonebook on page 76. Deleting a number from the list of previous calls Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone. Messages can only be sent when a SIM card is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the SIM Access Profile. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Send message. The SMS input menu is opened. The number previously chosen is already entered as the re-
cipient. 5. Enter and send your message. To find out more, please refer to the section Replying to a text message on page 84. List of previous calls When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth connection, the mobile phones call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-
nection has been established. The last number di-
alled appears at the top of the list. The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones. If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the person called is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. The list of previous calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. 78 PHONE Adding to a number from the list of previous calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Previous calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Add to number. The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing. 5. Make the change you want. 6. Select Call number. The telephone number stored in the list is not changed. List of received calls When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth connection, the mobile phones call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-
nection has been established. The last call re-
ceived appears at the top of the list. The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones. If the date and time information for the individ-
ual calls is not transferred from the mobile phone, the list begins with the unanswered calls. These are then followed by the accept-
ed calls. If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the caller is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. The list of received calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. It contains both accepted and missed calls. Storing a number from the list of received calls in the phonebook This function is only available when there is a SIM card inserted. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Store number. 5. Enter the details you want. Please refer to the section PCM phonebook on page 76. Calling a number from the list of received calls Deleting a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number or name you want. 4. If there is more than one telephone number stored for a name, select the number you want. 5. Select Call number. Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Delete. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. 6. The number is deleted from the list. PHONE 79
+
w p The DTMF dialling digits are appended to the digits of the telephone number without any breaks. To enter the + character, touch and hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone in-
put menu. The digits of the telephone number are di-
alled first. As soon as the connection to the telephone number dialled has been es-
tablished, the DTMF dialling digits must be confirmed again. To enter the w character, touch and hold the * symbol in the telephone input menu. The digits of the telephone number are di-
alled first. The PCM then waits until the connection has been established before dialling the DTMF dialling digits.
>>>
Sending a message to a number from the list of received calls Messages can only be sent when a SIM card is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the SIM Access Profile. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Send message. The SMS input menu is opened. The number previously chosen is already entered as the re-
cipient. 5. Enter and send your message. To find out more, please refer to the section Replying to a text message on page 84. Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be sent once a telephone connection has been estab-
lished. You need this function to communicate with touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in remotely to your answering machine). Touch tone dialling 1. Select Dial number in the call menu. The numerical input menu is opened. 2. Enter the digits you want. Each digit is immediately transmitted as a DTMF tone. Adding to a number from the list of received calls Combining DTMF tones with a telephone number You can use the + and w characters in the numer-
ical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with the entry of a telephone number. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Received calls. 3. Select the number you want. 4. Select Add to number. The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing. 5. Make the change you want. 6. Select Call number. The telephone number stored in the list is not changed. 80 PHONE The p character cannot be entered in the telephone input menu. It is, howev-
er, recognised by the PCM if it is stored in a telephone number on the SIM card, for example. In this case, the behaviour of the PCM is the same as the behaviour for + described above. Establishing an additional call You can establish an additional call while there is another call active. Some mobile phones do not support making or accepting a second call. In this case, the New call menu item is greyed out during an active call. 1. Select New call in the call menu. 2. You then have the following options for enter-
ing the telephone number:
Dial number:
The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. Please refer to the section Dialling a number on page 75. Phonebook:
You can insert a number stored in the phone-
book. To find out more, please refer to the section Calling a phonebook entry on page 76. Previous calls:
You can insert a telephone number from the list of previous calls. To find out more, please refer to the section Calling a number from the list of previous calls on page 78. Received calls:
You can insert a telephone number from the list of received calls. To find out more, please refer to the section Storing a number from the list of received calls in the phonebook on page 79. The original call is held while the new connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or establish a conference call. To find out more, please refer to the section Call waiting (swapping) and confer-
ence on page 82. Call waiting The Call waiting function is only available if sup-
ported by the network provider. The Call waiting function must also be activated in the call settings for the PCM or the mobile phone. To find out more, please refer also to the section Call waiting (swapping) and conference on page 65. Rejecting a waiting call If you receive another call while there is already one active, you will hear a call waiting tone. The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a message appears in the bottom line. Select Reject. The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a busy signal. If the callers telephone number is transmitted, the number or name appears in the Received calls list. PHONE 81 Swapping between the calls (call waiting) 1. Select Swap. The system swaps to the other call. The previ-
ously active call is put on hold. 2. Select Swap again to return to the call on hold. 3. To end one of the two calls, select End call 1 or End call 2.
- or -
Select End all to end both calls. Conferencing the two calls 1. Select Conference. Both calls are activated and connected so that all parties can speak to each other. 2. To end one of the two calls, select End call 1 or End call 2.
- or -
Select End all to end the conference. Accepting a waiting call Select Answer. The waiting call is accepted and activated. The previously active call is put on hold. You then have the option to switch between the two calls or to establish a conference with both callers. To find out more, please refer to the section Call waiting (swapping) and confer-
ence on page 82. The PCM will not accept a third incoming call. The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to the mailbox. Ending a connected call Select End connected call. The currently active call is ended and the first call that is on hold is activated again. 82 PHONE Call waiting (swapping) and conference The Call waiting & conf. function is only available if supported by the network provider. When using the Bluetooth hands-free unit, this function is only available for a limited selection of devices. A prerequisite for this function is that there are two calls, one of which is active and one of which is on hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to the sections Establishing an additional call on page 63 and Accepting a waiting call on page 64. Select Call waiting & conf.. You now have a number of options:
Using supplementary services Supplementary services are services that can be called up using star and hash codes. The supplementary services can either be entered in the number selection menu or selected in the phonebook (provided they have been stored here). The last digit of a supplementary service is always the # character. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Dial number. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. 3. Select the individual digits and symbols of the supplementary service one after the other. 4. Select Send. The respective service is called up. If the reply text is too long, it is truncated at the bottom right with .... 5. If necessary, display the entire text by select-
ing Details. Making an emergency call 1. Press the c button. 2. Select i. 3. Select Emergency call. 4. Select one of the two menu items in the emer-
gency call menu that appears:
Yes If you select Yes, a connection is estab-
lished to the emergency service. No If you select No, no emergency call is made. Instead the previous menu is opened again. You can also make an emergency call:
during an active call, without having to enter a PIN, while the SIM card is being checked as well as without a valid SIM card (depending on the country and network). If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, you can call up the current location in-
formation in the event of an emergency call. To do this, select the Location info function. Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only) You can create and receive text messages (SMS) with the Messages function. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. The list of received text messages is opened. Small symbols indicate the status or type of the text messages:
unread text message, read text message, unread vCard, read vCard. vCards can be sent by other devices to the PCM via Bluetooth or SMS. PHONE 83 Reply with NO: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. The reply NO is appended to the end of the text. You can edit or add to the text as you want. Templates: A list of the message templates is opened and a template can be accepted or ed-
ited by selecting it. Creating a reply with new text 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to reply to. 4. Select Reply. 5. Select New text. The input menu is opened. 6. Enter the text you want using the input menu. 7. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-
ready entered in the text field. 8. Select Send to send the message. Arrival of a text message When a new text message arrives, a closed enve-
lope symbol is displayed in the bottom line regard-
less of the menu selected. If a flashing envelope symbol is displayed in the bottom line, it means there is no more storage space available on the SIM card for text messag-
es. To be able to receive further messages, one or more saved messages must first be deleted. To find out more, please refer to the section De-
leting a text message on page 87. The arrival of a text message can also be indicat-
ed by an audible signal. To find out more, please refer to the section Switching the SMS signal tone on/off on page 100. Arrival of a vCard The arrival of a vCard is indicated by a message in the bottom line as well as by an audible signal. The envelope symbol in the bottom line is not dis-
played. Reading a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it. If you have received a text message with your mobile phone and cannot read it on the PCM display, this means that the text message was stored in your mobile phones memory and not on the SIM card. The PCM does not have access to the mobile phone memory. In this case, please check whether the stor-
age location for the text messages can be changed in your mobile phones settings. Please consult the operating instructions for your mobile phone for this purpose. Replying to a text message The following options are available to you:
New text: The input menu is opened and new text can be entered. Attach reply: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. You can edit or add to the text as you want. Reply with YES: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. The reply YES is appended to the end of the text. You can edit or add to the text as you want. 84 PHONE Creating a text message with attached reply 6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu 8. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to reply to. 4. Select Reply. 5. Select Attach reply. The input menu is opened. The reply is append-
ed to the text received. 6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu and confirm by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-
ready entered in the text field. 7. Select Send to send the message. Replying to a text message with Yes or No 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to reply to. 4. Select Reply. 5. Select Reply with YES or Reply with NO. The input menu is opened. and confirm by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-
ready entered in the text field. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-
ready entered in the text field. 9. Select Send to send the message. 7. Select Send to send the message. Replying to a text message using a text template 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to reply to. 4. Select Reply. 5. Select Templates. 6. Select the template you want in the list that is displayed. 7. Select Edit template if applicable and make the changes you want in the text. Otherwise, select Use template and add any missing information. Creating and sending a new text message The following options are available to you for cre-
ating a text message:
New text: The input menu is opened and new text can be entered. Last text: The input menu is opened and the text of the last message is shown in the text field. You can edit or add to this text as you want. Templates: A list of the message templates is opened and a template can be accepted or ed-
ited by selecting it. PHONE 85 Creating a text message with new text 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the first list entry, New message, in the list that appears. 4. Select New text. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the text you want using the input menu. 6. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. 7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient. The following options are available to you:
Enter the digits in the input menu. Select Phonebook to insert the number from the phonebook. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Previous calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Received calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. 8. Select Send to send the message. Editing and sending the text of the last message Creating a text message using a text template 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the first list entry, New message, in the list that appears. 4. Select Templates. 5. Select the template you want in the list that is displayed. 6. Select Edit template if applicable and make the changes you want in the text. Otherwise, select Use template and add any missing information. 7. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the first list entry, New message, in the list that appears. 4. Select Last text. 5. Edit the text displayed using the input menu and add to it if applicable. 6. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. 7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient. The following options are available to you:
Enter the digits in the input menu. Select Phonebook to insert the number from the phonebook. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Previous calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Received calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. 8. Select Send to send the message. 86 PHONE 8. Enter the telephone number of the recipient. 6. Enter the telephone number of the recipient. The following options are available to you:
Enter the digits in the input menu. Select Phonebook to insert the number from the phonebook. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Previous calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Received calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. The following options are available to you:
Enter the digits in the input menu. Select Phonebook to insert the number from the phonebook. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Previous calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. Select Received calls to insert the number from the list. Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu. 9. Select Send to send the message. 7. Select Send to send the message. Forwarding a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to forward. 4. Select Forward. The input menu is opened. 5. Edit the text message as you want and confirm by selecting OK. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. Deleting a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the text message you want to delete. 4. Select Delete. You can then choose whether to delete the se-
lected text message only or the entire list. Deleting the selected text message 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The selected text message is deleted. Deleting all text messages 5. Select Delete all. 6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all again. The text messages are deleted. Reading a vCard 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 4. Select All details to view all of the details in the vCard. PHONE 87 4. Select Accept all. 5. Select Accept all again to confirm the prompt that appears. The details of the vCards are checked and the valid addresses and telephone numbers are accepted. Editing vCard details The addresses and telephone numbers contained on a vCard are listed in the vCard details. The fol-
lowing symbols are used:
Details are correct and are accepted when the vCard is saved. Details are correct, but are not accepted when the vCard is saved. An appropriate message will be displayed.
?
Details are not correct and can be changed or entered again if necessary. The procedure for editing details is described be-
low using address data as an example. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 4. Select Addresses. The addresses are checked. 5. Select the address with the ? symbol. The address is checked again. A search for similar addresses is performed. If similar addresses are found, these are listed after the check is completed. Inserting and editing a similar address 6. Select a similar address from the list. 7. Select Edit if applicable and make the chang-
es you want in the address input menu. 8. Select Accept. After selecting Accept, the address can no longer be edited. Accepting vCards If you save the vCard, the following data is ac-
cepted:
the telephone numbers contained in the phonebook as well as the addresses in the personal destination memory in the navigation menu. To find out more, please refer also to the section Personal destination memory on page 146. Accepting a single vCard 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 4. Select Accept. The details of the vCard are checked. 5. Confirm the acceptance of the valid addresses and telephone numbers by selecting OK. Accepting all vCards 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 88 PHONE Re-entering an address Discarding all vCards 6. Select Re-enter address. The address input menu is opened. If no similar addresses are found during checking, the address input menu opens auto-
matically. 7. Enter the address you want. 8. Select Accept. After selecting Accept, the address can no longer be edited. Discarding (deleting) vCards Discarding a single vCard 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 4. Select Discard. 5. Confirm the prompt by selecting Yes. The vCard is closed and deleted from the list of received messages. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it. 4. Select Discard
> Discard all. 5. Select Discard all again to confirm the prompt that appears. The vCards are closed and deleted from the list of received messages. Numbers in text messages If a text message contains telephone numbers or geographical coordinates, you can store these di-
rectly in the phonebook or list of personal destina-
tions. Calling telephone numbers from a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it. 4. Select Extract number. A list of the numbers contained in the text mes-
sage is displayed. 5. Select the number you want in the list. 6. Select Add to number if applicable and enter the necessary digits. 7. Select Call number. The call is made. Storing telephone numbers from a text message
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it. 4. Select Extract number. A list of the numbers contained in the text mes-
sage is displayed. 5. Select the number you want in the list. 6. Select Store number. 7. Enter the details you want. To find out more, please refer to the section PCM phonebook on page 76. PHONE 89 Creating a template Included in the list of templates are some blank en-
tries that you can edit as you want. 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select the first list entry, New message, in the list that appears. 4. Select Templates. 5. Select a blank template in the list that is dis-
6. Select Edit template and enter the text you played. want. 7. Confirm your entry by selecting OK. The template is saved with the entered con-
tents and will be subsequently displayed in the list. 8. Select Use template and add any missing in-
formation. 9. Enter the telephone number as described in the section Creating a text message using a text template on page 86. 10.Select Send to send the edited template. 5. Select Store position. The input menu is opened and the coordinate is entered in the input field. 6. Enter the name of the geographical coordinate and confirm your entry by selecting OK. The geographical coordinate is stored in the list of personal destinations and the map view is displayed again. Displaying the complete text 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it. 4. Select Complete text. The contents of the text message are shown across the entire display. Using geographical coordinates for route guidance 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Extract number. 4. Open the relevant geographical coordinate by selecting it. The map view is displayed and the geographi-
cal coordinate is shown. To find out more, please refer also to the section Map display on page 166. 5. Select Start route guidance. The route is calculated and route guidance starts. Storing geographical coordinates 1. Press the c button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Extract number. 4. Open the relevant geographical coordinate by selecting it. The map view is displayed and the geographi-
cal coordinate is shown. To find out more, please refer also to the section Map display on page 166. 90 PHONE Telephone settings
(PCM telephone) Switching the PCM telephone on/off Switching the telephone on 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> Switch on telephone. The telephone is switched on. Switching the telephone off 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> Switch off telephone. The telephone is switched off. All func-
tions not dependent on the telephone are still available. Setting ringtones Setting the ringtone type 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> Sound PHONE
> Ringtone type. A list of the available ringtones is dis-
played. 4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it. The ringtone type is played after it is selected. 5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if nec-
essary by turning the left rotary knob t. The volume level set in this way is saved when you exit the menu. If the connected mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth (inband ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed out and the ringtone must be set on the mo-
bile phone. Setting the ringtone volume 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> Sound PHONE
> Ringtone volume. 4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-
bols and
. Selecting a network You can set your PCM so that the network will be automatically or manually selected. This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> Network selection. PHONE 91 4. Select one of the two available menu items:
Automatic The PCM automatically selects the mobile phone network of the SIM card that is logged in. If this network is not found (e.g. when abroad), the network of a roaming partner is automatically selected. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings
> IMEI. The device number is displayed. SIM settings This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile. Changing the PIN This function allows you to change the PIN of your SIM card. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> SIM settings
> Change PIN. The input menu for PIN entry is displayed. You must start by entering the current PIN. 4. Enter the current PIN by selecting the buttons on the keypad shown and confirm your entry by selecting OK. You are then prompted to enter the new PIN. Switching 3-way calling on/off Problems may occur with 3-way calling on the PCM as these functions are not correctly support-
ed by all mobile phones and telephone networks
(in particular CDMA networks). It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched off in such cases in order to ensure reliable tele-
phone operation. This function is only available if your mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the Hands-Free Profile. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Telephone settings. 4. Select 3-way calling to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Manual If you select Manual, the PCM telephone searches for the currently available net-
works, from which you can choose the mo-
bile phone network you want to use. If a manually selected network is lost for more than 10 seconds, the system switches to au-
tomatic network selection. Displaying the IMEI The IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) is a serial number that permits unique identifica-
tion of the hardware in mobile radio equipment. This number allows different network providers to block the telephone in the event of misuse. 92 PHONE 5. Enter the new PIN by selecting the buttons on the keypad shown and confirm your entry by selecting OK. You are then prompted to enter the new PIN a second time to confirm it. 6. Enter and confirm the new PIN again. If the two new PINs match you will see the mes-
sage PIN has been changed. If the two entries do not match, you will be prompted to enter the new PIN again. Switching the PIN prompt on or off The PIN prompt function allows you to switch the PIN prompt on and off. If the function is activated, you will be prompted for the PIN after you insert the SIM card. If the function is deactivated, the PIN prompt is deacti-
vated. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> SIM settings. 4. Select PIN prompt to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. 5. Enter the PIN if necessary. The PIN prompt is switched on or off if the PIN is entered correctly. The PIN prompt cannot be switched off with some SIM cards. The PIN cannot be changed using the Change PIN function while the PIN prompt is switched off. Using a stored PIN If the Last PIN function is activated, the PIN of the SIM card currently inserted is stored. The next time you insert the SIM card, the stored PIN is au-
tomatically used for the prompt. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> SIM settings. 4. Select Last PIN to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Call settings
(PCM telephone) This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile. Activating call forwarding Call forwarding allows you to forward (divert) calls to another telephone number (e.g. to your answer-
ing machine). When you first access the call forwarding system, the status of all call diversions in the network is au-
tomatically queried. The individual call forwarding functions cannot be selected during this time. Activating and deactivating call forwarding is not supported in all networks. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Call settings
> Call forwarding. If an incorrect PIN entry is registered after the SIM card is inserted, the last PIN will not be used any further. The input menu and the number of attempts still possible are dis-
played instead. PHONE 93 4. Select one of the following settings for call for-
5. Select Switch on. The input menu is opened. 6. Enter the telephone number you want for the call diversion and confirm your entry by select-
ing OK.
- or -
Select Phonebook. After selecting Phonebook you can select a number from the phonebook. The call is then diverted to this number. 7. If you set the No answer call diversion type, you also need to set the delay after which the calls are to be diverted. Select Delay. Set the delay you want by selecting it in the list that appears. The relevant call diversion is then activated and the settings are shown on the display. Checking the status of the call diversion 1. Select the type of call forwarding you want. 2. Select Check status. The current status is then queried in the net-
work and shown on the display after a few sec-
onds. Deactivating call forwarding 1. Select the type of call forwarding you want. 2. Select Switch off. The corresponding call diversion is deactivat-
ed. Switching the Call waiting function on/
off If the Call waiting function is activated, an incom-
ing call will be indicated during an active call. The caller hears a ringing tone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 1. Select SET PHONE
> Call settings
> Call waiting. 2. Select one of the following options:
Select Switch on to activate the function. Select Switch off to deactivate the func-
tion. Select Check status if the current status is unknown and should be queried in the net-
work. The current status will be displayed in the in-
formation area as soon as the query is an-
swered. warding:
Divert all activates call forwarding for all incoming calls. Busy activates call forwarding for calls that come in while you are on another call. To be able to activate call forwarding with the Busy setting, the Call waiting function must be switched off first. No answer activates call forwarding for calls that you cannot or do not want to accept. The call is forwarded to the entered number after a cer-
tain time. Cannot be reached activates call forwarding for calls that come in while the telephone is switched off or is not ready to receive calls. Cancel all deactivates all call diversions at once. The telephone numbers entered for the individual call diversions remain saved in the network and are displayed again the next time call forwarding is activated. 94 PHONE Switching the Redial function on/off If the Redial function is activated, the telephone automatically redials a number that could not be reached because the line was busy. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Call settings. 4. Select Redial to activate (
) the function. deactivate (
) or Setting transfer of your own number If the Send own number function is activated, your own telephone number will be sent to the oth-
er party. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Call settings
> Send own number. 4. Select one of the following menu items:
Yes if you want to send your own number. No if you want to suppress sending of your own number. As network if you want to adopt the net-
work operator or providers setting. Depending on the network operator or provid-
er, it may not be possible to switch off send-
ing of your own number. If you need to dial numbers with special char-
acters (+, #, or *), you must choose the As network setting. Setting automatic call answering If the Auto. answer function is activated, the PCM automatically answers all incoming calls after the first ring. The active audio source is muted and the hands-free function automatically activated. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Call settings. 4. Select Auto. answer to activate (
deactivate (
) the function. Bluetooth settings
(PCM telephone) Authorised Bluetooth devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains:
mobile phones MP3 players headsets data devices as well as
,
,
. Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Bluetooth settings
> Device list.
) or Devices that can be connected with the PCM using different profiles appear only once in the list. The symbol used always corresponds to the main application. Mobile phones that can also be used as MP3 players or data devices appear in this list with the telephone symbol. PHONE 95 Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. es. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Connect. Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for exam-
ple when transferring a vCard. Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth device from the PCM 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. es. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Disconnect. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting es. Yes. Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Setting the profile of the authorised Bluetooth device With mobile phones that support both the SIM Ac-
cess Profile and the Hands-Free Profile you can switch between the two profiles. 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select SIM access on or SIM access off de-
pending on whether you want to activate or de-
activate SIM card access. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The switchover option is only available for mo-
bile phones that support both profiles. This function is not available in all other cases. 96 PHONE Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devic-
es. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address, the connection quality as well as the supported services. Adding a new Bluetooth device For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. If you want to connect a mobile phone using the SIM Access Profile, external SIM mode needs to be activated on some devices. Further details can be found in the operating man-
ual for your mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Bluetooth settings
> New device. A search is started and a list of the devic-
es found is displayed. 4. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. With some mobile phones, the connection re-
quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-
book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phones list of devices. The connection will then be established auto-
matically in the future, without the need for fur-
ther checks. Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone. It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth device to be authorised. If the list of authorised Bluetooth devices is full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first de-
lete a device from the list. An appropriate message will be displayed. To find out more, please refer to the section Deleting an au-
thorised Bluetooth device from the list on page 96. PHONE 97 Setting visibility To ensure that your PCM can be connected to oth-
er devices via the Bluetooth interface, it must be visible (=recognisable) for other devices during the connection operation. To increase security, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation. To prevent further unwanted connection requests, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Bluetooth settings.
> Select PCM visible to activate (
) or deactivate (
) visibility of the PCM. Finding the cordless handset This function starts the search for the cordless handset. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Bluetooth settings
> Find handset. The search is started. If the handset has been found and is not in the charging cra-
dle, it will ring in confirmation and to help you locate it in the vehicle. Phonebook settings Setting the memory for the phonebook You can set whether the phonebook entries on the SIM card, the phonebook entries in the telephone memory and/or the vCards stored in the PCM should be used for the display in the phonebook. This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the PCM to your list in the mobile phone. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Phonebook settings
> Phonebook memory. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting it. If the transfer of the phonebook data from your mobile phone to the PCM fails, it may be because your mobile phone is working with security mechanisms that affect transfer us-
ing the Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP).
>>>
98 PHONE These security mechanisms require the PCM to be authorised on your mobile phone. As part of this, the telephone requests a user ID and a password from the PCM. In order for the PCM to gain access to the phonebook, it must log into the telephone. Since the PCM uses the fixed parameters UserID: PCM3 and Pass: 0000 for this login, these parameters must be preset as permissible on your mobile phone. Please refer to the operating instructions for your mobile phone to find out whether these settings are required on your mobile phone and how to configure them. Setting sorting You can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and call lists to the display on your mobile phone. You have the following options for sorting the phonebook:
Standard The phonebook is sorted by surname. Alternative The phonebook is sorted by first name. You have the following options for sorting the call lists:
Standard The call lists are sorted in the same order in which the entries were transferred from the mobile phone. Alternative The order of the entries transferred from the mobile phone is reversed. This option supports some mobile phones that transfer the oldest entries first. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Phonebook settings
> Sorting. Setting sorting of the phonebook 4. Select Phonebook. 5. Select the sorting you want. Setting sorting of the call lists 4 Select Call lists. 5. Select the sorting you want. Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook If the Auto update function is activated, the phonebook and the call lists of a mobile phone are transferred as soon as the PCM is connected to this mobile phone. The data stored in the PCM is replaced by the cur-
rent phonebook and current call lists from the mo-
bile phone as soon as transfer is complete. If the Auto update function is deactivated, the data will no longer be updated. This function is not supported by all mobile phones. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Phonebook settings. 4. Select Auto update to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Your phonebook data can then only be ac-
cessed when the corresponding mobile phone is connected to the PCM. PHONE 99 Switching the SMS signal tone on/off The signal tone, which sounds when there is an in-
coming text message, can be switched on and off. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Messages/data. 4. Select SMS signal tone to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone) This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile. Changing the number of the SMS service centre 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Messages/data
> SMS service centre. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The current number is entered in the input field. 4. Enter the telephone number you want and con-
firm your entry by pressing OK. Transferring the phonebook This function transfers the phonebook and call lists of the connected mobile phone into the PCM again. The data stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook and current lists from the mobile phone when transfer is complete. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Phonebook settings
> Transfer phonebook. Deleting the phonebook The copy of the phonebook transferred to the PCM can be deleted again. Your mobile phones phonebook remains un-
changed. 1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PHONE
> Phonebook settings
> Delete phonebook. 100 PHONE Cordless handset There is a cordless handset available for your PCM. Display Left selection button Rocker button Right selection button End call button Lift handset button Numerical keypad Using a handset while driving is not permitted in all countries. Therefore, please observe the country-specific laws and regulations. Charging the cordless handset Place the handset in the charging cradle. Once the internal telephone is switched on, the SIM card inserted and the PIN entered, most of the functions of the internal telephone will also be available on the handset. You can even enter the PIN on either the handset or the PCM. In order to increase battery life, the display is switched off after a certain time, provided the handset is not in the charging cradle. If a mobile phone is connected to the PCM us-
ing the Hands-Free Profile, the handset func-
tions are not available. Switching the cordless handset on/off Press and hold the End call button for a few seconds to switch the handset on or off. General operation Once you have entered the PIN, the telephone logs into a mobile phone network. On the display of the cordless handset you will see the network provid-
ers logo, the current signal strength, the Blue-
tooth symbol, the charge level of the battery and two menu items. You can select or open the menu items using the selection buttons beneath them. In many cases this brings you to a further menu. You navigate within the individual menus using the rocker button that can be pressed at the top, bot-
tom, left and right edges to move the highlighting in the respective direction. Pressing the right selection button under the Back menu item brings you to the last menu opened or the next menu level up. PHONE 101 Temporarily muting the handset microphone You can mute the handset microphone during a phone call. 1. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 2. Select the Microphone mute menu item us-
ing the rocker button. 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Establishing an additional call You can establish a further connection with the New call function. You can either:
enter a new telephone number or display and call entries from the phonebook, the list of previous calls or the list of received calls. Rejecting a call When there is a call incoming, press the right selection button under the Reject menu item. Dialling a number 1. Enter the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other using the keypad. 2. Press the left selection button under the Call menu item. The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed. If the number dialled is busy, this will be indicat-
ed by a message on the display. Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code. You can correct an incorrectly entered number by pressing the right selection button under the Delete menu item. Accepting a call As soon as a call comes in, a menu is temporarily displayed on the display of the handset. If available, the telephone number is displayed to-
gether with the name of the caller (if an assign-
ment to an entry stored in the phonebook is pos-
sible). Press the left selection button under the Ac-
cept. menu item.
- or -
Press the Lift handset button on the handset. If the handset is not in the cradle, the ringtone of the PCM is accompanied by a further audio signal. Ending a call Press the right selection button under the End menu item.
- or -
Press the End call button on the handset. 102 PHONE Entering a new telephone number 7. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 8. Select Call using the rocker button. 9. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 1. Press the left selection button under the Op-
2. Select the New call menu item using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
tions menu item. rocker button. lection menu item. 4. Enter the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other using the keypad. 5. Press the left selection button under the Call menu item. Calling an entry from one of the lists 1. Press the left selection button under the Op-
2. Select the New call menu item using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
tions menu item. rocker button. lection menu item. 4. Select the list you want using the rocker but-
5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 6. Select the list item you want using the rocker ton. button. The active call is retained if the second connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or hold a conference call. Call waiting (swapping) and conference The call waiting (swapping) and conference func-
tions are only available if supported and unlocked by the network provider. Call waiting (swapping) While you are on a call, you may receive a call from someone else. 1. Press the left selection button under the Ac-
cept. menu item if you would like to accept the incoming call. 2. Press the right selection button under the Swap menu item to swap between the two calls. PHONE 103 Phonebook If your mobile phone is connected to the PCM us-
ing the SIM Access Profile, the data from the tele-
phone memory and from the SIM card will be transferred. Memory entries may contain multiple telephone numbers for a name in this case. Displaying the phonebook Press the right selection button under the Phonebook menu item.
- or -
Press the rocker button upwards or down-
wards in the main menu of the handset. Calling a phonebook entry 1. Open the phonebook. 2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Op-
rocker button. tions menu item. 4. Select Call using the rocker button and press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item.
- or -
Press the Lift handset button. You can use the Search option to search for specific entries in the phonebook. This is use-
ful if there are many entries in your phonebook and you dont want to have to scroll through the entire list. Creating and storing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Open the phonebook. 2. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 3. Select New entry using the rocker button. 4. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 5. Enter the name for the new phonebook entry. The letters on the keypad are active while you are entering the name. This means you can enter the letters a, b and c, for example, by pressing the digit 2 repeatedly. The digits are reactivated while entering a tele-
phone number. The input mode can be switched using the # but-
ton. 6. Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. Conference 1. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item as soon as you are connect-
ed with two callers. 2. Select the Conference menu item using the rocker button. 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. The two calls are connected and the display shows that you are conferenced. 4. Press the right selection button under the End menu item to end the two calls. 104 PHONE 7. Enter the number for the new phonebook en-
Deleting a phonebook entry try. 8. Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. The data is stored on the SIM card. An appro-
priate message is displayed if there is no more space on the SIM card. Editing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Open the phonebook. 2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Op-
rocker button. tions menu item. 4. Select Edit entry using the rocker button. 5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 6. Edit the name of the phonebook entry as you 7. Press the left selection button under the OK want. menu item. 8. Edit the telephone number of the phonebook entry as you want. 9. Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. The phonebook entry is stored. 1. Open the phonebook. 2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Op-
rocker button. tions menu item. 4. Select Delete entry using the rocker button. 5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 6. Press the left selection button under the Yes menu item to confirm the prompt. Text messages (SMS) Some menu items are not available before the SMS list is loaded. Reading a text message 1. Press the left selection button under the Menu menu item. 2. Select the Messages menu item using the rocker button. lection menu item. button. 4. Select the Input menu item using the rocker 5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. The stored messages are listed. Small sym-
bols (open or closed envelopes) indicate whether or not the message has already been read. 6. Select the message you want using the rocker 7. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 8. Select the Read menu item using the rocker button. button. 9. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. The text message is opened. Replying to/forwarding a text message 1. Press the left selection button under the Menu menu item. 2. Select the Messages menu item using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
rocker button. lection menu item. button. 5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
4. Select the Input menu item using the rocker PHONE 105 6. Select the message you want using the rocker Creating and sending a new text message 7. Press the left selection button under the Op-
7. Press the left selection button under the Op-
1. Press the left selection button under the 8. Select the Send menu item using the rocker 2. Select the Messages menu item using the 9. Press the left selection button under the Se-
button. tions menu item. 8. Using the rocker button, select Reply or Forward depending on the function you want to use. 9. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 10.Enter the text using the letters on the keypad. 11.Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 12.Select the Send menu item using the rocker button. 13.Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. The telephone number of the text message sender is displayed. 14.Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. The text message is sent. Menu menu item. rocker button. lection menu item. rocker button. lection menu item. 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
4. Select the Compose menu item using the 5. Press the left selection button under the Se-
6. Enter the text using the letters on the keypad. The letters on the keypad are active while you are entering the name. This means you can en-
ter the letters a, b and c, for example, by pressing the digit 2 repeatedly. The digits are reactivated while entering a tele-
phone number. Use the # button to switch the input mode be-
tween uppercase, lowercase and digits. If you want to insert the text from a template, select the Discard template menu item, highlight the template you want using the rocker button and insert it by pressing the left selection button under the Selection menu item. 106 PHONE tions menu item. button. lection menu item. 10.Enter the telephone number. 11.Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. The text message is sent. Please proceed as follows if you want to send the message to a telephone number from the phonebook or from one of the two lists (Pre-
vious calls and Received calls):
12.Press the left selection button under the Search menu item. 13.Select the list you want (Phonebook, Previ-
ous calls and Received calls) using the rocker button. 14.Select the entry you want. 15.Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. The number is inserted in the text field. 16.Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. The text message is sent. Deleting a text message 1. Press the left selection button under the Menu menu item. 2. Select the Messages menu item using the 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
rocker button. lection menu item. tions menu item. 4. Press the left selection button under the Op-
5. Select the Input menu item using the rocker 6. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. 7. Select the message you want using the rocker button. button. Settings 1. Press the left selection button under the Menu menu item. 8. Press the left selection button under the Op-
2. Select the Settings menu item using the tions menu item. 9. Using the rocker button, select the Delete menu item if you only want to delete the select-
ed text message. Or:
Using the rocker button, select the Delete all menu item if you want to delete all saved text messages. 10.Press the left selection button under the Yes menu item to delete the message. rocker button. 3. Press the left selection button under the Se-
lection menu item. You then have the following options:
Language:
Under this menu item you can set the menu language you want for the handset. Factory setting:
Under this menu item you can reset the handset to the factory settings. Lighting:
Under this menu item you can enter a value for the illumination of the handset display. Ring tone:
Under this menu item you can set the volume and profile (ascending volume) for the hand-
set ringtone. Info:
Under this menu item you will find details of the hardware and software used in your handset. 4. Select the menu item you want. 5. Press the left selection button under the Op-
tions menu item. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Press the left selection button under the OK menu item. PHONE 107 INFO Displaying traffic messages (TMC)................109 Displaying sections of the route ...................111 Displaying information about the location......111 Displaying detailed information about the active audio source.....................................111 108 INFO INFO In the d menu you will find various general in-
formation such as the current audio source, the date and time and the signal strength for your tel-
ephone network. You also have the option to call up more detailed information about the traffic situation, your current location, the individual sections in your route or the current audio source. Displaying traffic messages (TMC) Various FM radio stations transmit traffic messag-
es in addition to their radio programme (TMC mes-
sages = Traffic Message Channel). The PCM eval-
uates and displays this information. In some countries (e.g. Great Britain and France), the TMC information transmitted can vary signifi-
cantly depending on the local radio station tuned into. The navigation system takes these traffic messag-
es into consideration during dynamic route calcu-
lation. The broadcasting stations are responsible for the quality of the traffic messages. We there-
fore cannot accept any liability for the com-
pleteness and correctness of the information. Austria: The location and event code was made available by ASFINAG and BMVIT. You can display the current traffic messages in a list. If the route guidance component of your navi-
gation system is active, the traffic messages on your route are displayed in a separate list. The following types of traffic messages are differ-
entiated:
Objects on the road Objects on a section of the current, personal route Accident Accident on a section of the current, personal route Roadworks Roadworks on a section of the cur-
rent, personal route Slow moving traffic or traffic jam Slow moving traffic or traffic jam on a section of the current, personal route INFO 109 4. Select a traffic message from the list to call up more detailed information on it. You then see a map section showing the route section in question as well as the full text of the traffic message. 5. You can change the map scale if necessary by
. and selecting the two symbols You can scroll through the messages by select-
or by turning q ing the symbols the right rotary knob. In the case of very long traffic messages, you can scroll to the previous or next page by se-
lecting the symbols and and
. Accident hazard Accident hazard on a section of the current, personal route Route section blocked Section of the current, personal route blocked Information Information concerning a section of the current, personal route 1. Press the d button. 2. Select Traffic messages. If route guidance is active, the current traffic messages on your route are listed. 3. Select All traffic messages if necessary. A list containing all current traffic messages is opened. The traffic messages on your route are highlighted in orange in this list. 110 INFO Displaying sections of the route If you have started the route guidance component of your navigation system, a list containing all sec-
tions of your route will be displayed. This function is not available during trace record-
ing of off-road navigation. 1. Press the d button. 2. Select Route list. The sections of your route are listed and dis-
played. The section you are currently driving on is at the very top of this list and the final destination at the very bottom. 3. Select the section you want for a more detailed view. You then see a map section showing the route section in question. 4. You can change the map scale if necessary by selecting the two symbols You can scroll through the various sections by selecting the symbols or by turning the right rotary knob q. and and
. 5. If you wish to detour around this section of your route, select Detour. To find out more about setting detours, please refer to the section Setting a detour on page 153. If the display of the radio text has been switched off in the m menu, it will not be displayed here either. To find out more, please refer to the section Switching RDS ra-
dio text on/off on page 25. In TV mode with digital reception, the station, the start/end time, the name of the current programme, the progress bar (showing how far along the programme is) and the genre are displayed. Further details about the pro-
gramme can also be displayed in a list. If the text extends beyond the page, you can scroll through the text using the symbols and or by turning the right rotary knob q. The availability and amount of additional infor-
mation transmitted varies from station to sta-
tion. With analogue reception, only the name of the station and the channel on which the programme is being broadcast are displayed. Displaying information about the location This function displays the precise data for your current location. If the route guidance component of your naviga-
tion system is active, the next route section is also displayed. 1. Press the d button. 2. Select Location info. The information about your current location and its environs is displayed. Displaying detailed information about the active audio source This function displays information about the audio source currently active. The menu display is adapted to the active audio source. The procedure for calling up the detailed informa-
tion during radio mode is described here as an ex-
ample. 1. Press the d button. 2. Select Details FM. The available information is displayed. INFO 111 CAR Trip data display .........................................113 Setting the display group ..........................113 Setting the contents of the personal display113 Resetting trip data....................................114 ParkAssist..................................................114 Deactivating ParkAssist ............................115 Switching the ParkAssist display on/off .....115 Closing the ParkAssist display ...................115 Rear view camera .......................................116 Switching the rear view camera display on/off...........................................116 Closing the rear view camera display .........117 Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on/off..........................................117 Parking with the rear view camera display ..117 Picture settings for the rear view camera ...117 Combining ParkAssist and the rear view camera display.........................................118 Logbook ....................................................119 Activating/deactivating the logbook ...........119 Activating/deactivating the logbook reminder.....................................119 Setting the standard trip for the logbook....119 Editing data from the current trip...............120 Continuing recording from the last trip .......121 Storing a refuelling stop............................122 Viewing the list of stored trips ...................122 Managing the logbook lists........................122 Deleting trips ...........................................123 Transferring the logbook data ...................124 Bluetooth settings ..................................124 112 CAR The Sport display........................................127 Starting recording ....................................127 Stopping recording...................................128 Continuing recording ................................128 Ending a lap/starting a new lap .................129 Timing the interval ....................................129 Evaluating a recording ..............................129 Renaming a recording...............................130 Deleting recordings ..................................130 Deleting a lap...........................................130 Storing a lap as the reference lap ..............131 Defining the reference lap .........................131 Resetting the defined reference lap............131 Renaming the reference lap.......................131 Deleting the reference lap .........................131 Deleting all laps........................................132 Setting the display of additional data..........132 Transferring data......................................132 Bluetooth settings ..................................133 Extended memory.......................................135 Setting light options..................................135 Setting wiper options................................136 Setting reversing options ..........................137 Setting comfort options ............................137 Choosing the options for setting the air conditioning.........................................137 Personal trip data The trip data can be individually compiled in four data fields. Sport display Lap data can be recorded and evaluated using the stopwatch and the PCM. The data of relevance for the evaluation is shown in the Sport display as soon as record-
ing is started. The number of displays available to you is shown between the two arrow symbols and
. Setting the display group and Touch the
- or -
Turn the right rotary knob q. symbols. CARTrip data display The CAR menu provides you with a variety of use-
ful trip data such as the trip time, distance cov-
ered, average speed and average fuel consump-
tion. The following display groups are differentiated de-
pending on the vehicles equipment:
Total trip data The trip data is totalled continuously until re-
set. The trip data is retained even after the ve-
hicle has been stationary (with the ignition key removed) for relatively long periods. Trip data since ... The trip data is automatically reset after the car has been parked for 2 hours (with the igni-
tion key removed). Setting the contents of the personal display You can configure the contents of the individual data fields for the Personal trip data yourself. You can choose between general information such as date, time or outside temperature as well as various data fields from the navigation area such as arrival times, average speeds or consumption. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Personal settings. 4. Select the data field to be changed. A list containing multiple menu items is opened. 5. Select the menu item you want. The chosen menu item is inserted in the corre-
sponding data field. If you fill a data field with the Distance to next petrol station menu item, you can start a route calculation to this petrol station by touching the symbol on the display. If you select Start route guidance, route guidance to this petrol station is started. CAR 113 Resetting trip data button field for at least 1 sec-
Pressing the ond resets the trip data for the Total trip data and Trip data since ... display groups. 1. Press the w button. 2. Set the display to be reset by selecting the symbols 3. Select
. and for at least 1 second. The trip data in the corresponding display is re-
set. ParkAssist ParkAssist indicates the distance between the ve-
hicle and an object visually and acoustically for the driver when parking and manoeuvring. The visual parking aid of ParkAssist is shown on the PCM display. Obstacles located in front of and behind the vehicle are indicated using different col-
oured fields. These fields show the contour of ob-
stacles as well as their distance from the vehicle. ParkAssist is activated automatically when the ignition is turned on up to a speed of approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph). To find out more, please refer also to the cor-
responding chapter in the owners manual. WARNING!
Accident hazard. Even with ParkAssist, re-
sponsibility for parking and for assessing ob-
stacles lies with the driver. A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk of collision. Make sure that there are no people, ani-
mals or obstacles within the manoeuvring area. If the continuous tone sounds, do not move the vehicle any closer to an obstacle. 114 CAR The following coloured fields are used to show ob-
stacles and their distance from the vehicle:
Field colour Distance in front green Distance behind the vehicle
< 180 cm of the vehicle
< 120 cm yellow
< 80 cm
< 40 cm red red with continuous tone
< 30 cm
< 35 cm
< 80 cm
< 45 cm If ParkAssist detects a trailer, no distance in-
formation is displayed for the rear of the vehi-
cle. Switching the ParkAssist display on/off Switching the display on manually Switching the automatic display on/off If the function is activated, the visual parking aid is shown on the PCM under the following conditions:
when reverse gear is engaged, if a roll backwards is detected, if the distance at the front is less than 80 cm. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking. 4. Select ParkAssist to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select ParkAssist. The visual parking aid is shown on the PCM dis-
play. When the display is active, you can switch im-
mediately to the SET parking menu by press-
ing the i button. Closing the ParkAssist display The display is closed again as soon as you:
disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)), operate the electric parking brake, move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear selector into the P position, press one of the main menu buttons or press the Back button h. In the two last cases you can press the w button to return to the display. CAR 115 Deactivating ParkAssist ParkAssist can be deactivated using the A button in the roof control console. The indicator light in the button is lit when ParkAssist is deactivated. In this case there is no automatic display on the PCM. Manual activation of the display is not possi-
ble either. To find out more, please refer also to the section Switching the display on manually on page 115. Press the A button to deactivate or reactivate ParkAssist. The TV sound is suppressed while the image from the rear view camera is shown on the display. Audio source (FM, AM, CD/DVD, AUX and AUX BT) sound output continues uninter-
rupted. There is no rear view camera display when the parking brake is activated. Voice control is not available while the image is displayed. Always keep the rear view camera free from dirt, ice and snow, as these can have an ad-
verse effect on the camera image. WARNING!
Injury hazard. The rear view camera only serves to assist the driver. It does not replace looking over your shoulder. The display of objects captured by the rear view camera is distorted. The camera view does not cover the complete area behind the vehicle. Continue to pay attention to the complete area behind the vehicle. Rear view camera The rear view camera serves to monitor the area behind the vehicle during parking manoeuvres. The image from the rear view camera is shown on the PCM display. You have the option of displaying grid lines in the rear view camera image. These grid lines change according to the current position of the front wheels. They therefore show you where the cur-
rent steering wheel turn will bring you. 116 CAR Switching the rear view camera display on/off Switching automatic rear view camera display on/off If the function is activated, the rear view camera image appears on the PCM display automatically when reverse gear is engaged or when the rolling back of the vehicle is detected. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking. 4. Select Rear view camera to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Switching the rear view camera display on manually 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking
> Show RVC image. The image is shown on the PCM display. Closing the rear view camera display The rear view camera display is closed again as soon as you:
disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)), press one of the main menu buttons, press the Back button h, operate the electric parking brake or move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear selector into the P position. Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on/off No grid lines are displayed in the following sit-
uations:
manual activation of the rear view camera display, driving forwards, open tailgate or trailer detected. If your system is not calibrated or there is a steering angle sensor error, please visit a Por-
sche workshop. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking. 4. Select RVC grid lines to activate (
deactivate (
) the function. WARNING!
Accident hazard. If the grid lines touch or in-
tersect obstacles, there is a risk of collision. Make sure that there are no people, ani-
mals or obstacles within the manoeuvring area. Accident hazard. If the ground is uneven, the road is slippery or the vehicle is on an incline
(e.g. curb, hill) the actual lane may differ from the precalculated grid lines. Continue to pay attention to the complete area behind the vehicle. Picture settings for the rear view camera Setting the Brightness 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking
> RVC picture param.
> Brightness. Parking with the rear view camera display 1. Engage reverse gear. 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the grid lines guide you into the parking space as accurately as possible. 3. Drive backwards carefully until the edges of the blue parking aid are parallel to the parking space. 4. Turn the steering wheel to straighten up while the vehicle is stationary. Drive until the end of the lower edge of the blue parking aid is posi-
tioned at the end of the parking space. If the ground is uneven, the display of the grid lines may differ from the actual lane.
) or CAR 117 Setting the Colour 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking
> RVC picture param.
> Colour. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two or by turning the right ro-
symbols and tary knob t. 5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-
ed, select Back to RVC to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image. When the display is active, you can switch im-
mediately to the SET parking menu by press-
ing the i button. Combining ParkAssist and the rear view camera display You can combine the ParkAssist and rear view camera display. In this case you can show and hide ParkAssist by touching the vehicle on the dis-
play. ParkAssist is shown on either the left or right edge of the screen depending on the steering angle. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two or by turning the right ro-
symbols and tary knob t. 5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-
ed, select Back to RVC to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image. Setting the Contrast 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET parking
> RVC picture param.
> Contrast. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two or by turning the right ro-
symbols and tary knob t. 5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-
ed, select Back to RVC to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image. 118 CAR Logbook The logbook automatically records all the trips made by the vehicle and stores them together with a variety of relevant information. This includes:
the type of use (business trip, work trip or pri-
vate trip), the date and time, the start address, the destination address, the distance as well as the odometer reading at the start and destina-
tion locations. Recording of a trip is started and ended automat-
ically when the logbook is activated. It begins as soon as the vehicle key is inserted. When the vehicle key is removed, recording stops and the information is stored. If a distance of less than 100 metres (approx. 330 feet) is driven, the route is not recorded and is added to the next trip. The trips are recorded even if the PCM has been switched off with the left rotary knob. The logbook can record and store up to 1,500 trips. The stored data can be transferred to a Blue-
tooth device or a USB device. You can view and edit the logbook data on a PC us-
ing the supplied software. The logbook must be activated before it can be used. Activating/deactivating the logbook Activating/deactivating the logbook reminder If you have activated the Reminder function, the logbook menu appears for several seconds each time the PCM starts up. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 4. Select Reminder to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook. 4. Select Logbook active to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or Setting the standard trip for the logbook The Standard trip function allows you to choose the trip type to be set as standard at the start of a journey. The following trip types are available:
Business trip, Work trip, Private trip as well as Last trip. The Last trip trip type is only available if at least one trip has been recorded. CAR 119 A list of all the drivers created so far is opened. If a driver has been assigned a specific key, this is also shown in the list. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip 4. Insert the driver you want by selecting him or
> Trip destination. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Standard trip. 4. Select the trip type you want. Editing data from the current trip You can change the different pieces of data regis-
tered by the logbook during recording of a trip as many times as you want during the trip. Changing the trip type 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip. 4. Select the trip type you want. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Driver. her. Creating a new driver 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Driver 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. New driver. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name of the new driver and confirm by selecting OK. Changing the driver 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. If the current trip is not a Business trip, but rather a Work trip or Private trip, the only fields available to you are Driver and Re-
marks. 120 CAR Changing the trip destination 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. A list of all the destinations created so far is opened. 4. Insert the trip destination you want by select-
ing it. Creating a new trip destination 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Trip destination
> New trip destination. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the new trip destination you want and confirm by selecting OK. Changing the trip purpose Changing the contact person Changing the remarks 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. the same name in the header. the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Trip purpose. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Contact person. ing him or her. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Remarks. A list of the trip purposes already cre-
ated is opened. A list of the contact persons already created is opened. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the text you want and confirm by select-
4. Insert the trip purpose you want by selecting it. 4. Insert the contact person you want by select-
ing OK. Creating a new trip purpose 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Trip purpose
> New trip purpose. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the new trip purpose you want and con-
firm by selecting OK. Creating a new contact person 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Current trip
> Edit trip
> Contact person
> New contact person. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the new contact person and confirm by selecting OK. Continuing recording from the last trip If a trip has been completed with the logbook acti-
vated, the previous trip can be continued the next time a trip is started. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Continue trip. The data from the last recorded trip is dis-
played. You are then asked once more whether you want to continue the last trip. 4. Confirm the question by selecting Yes. Recording of the last trip is continued. CAR 121 Storing a refuelling stop If you want to store a refuelling stop in the trip cur-
rently being recorded, you can do so by selecting Refuelling stop. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Refuelling stop. The question Store refuelling stop? ap-
pears. 4. Confirm the question by selecting Yes. The refuelling stop is stored. Viewing the list of stored trips 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Trip list. The trip list is displayed. If a recording is currently in progress, it is displayed at the top of the list. 4. Select a trip to open a detailed view of it. You can scroll between the detailed views for the individual trips by selecting the symbols and
. You can switch between scrolling in the de-
tailed view and scrolling in the list by pressing the right rotary knob r. Managing the logbook lists In addition to the lists of stored trips, lists for the Driver, the Trip purpose, the Trip destination and the Contact person are also created in the log-
book. Creating a new list entry You can create a new entry by selecting the first entry in any list (e.g. New driver). 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 122 CAR 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Manage lists. 4. Select the list you want. 5. Select the top list entry. The input menu is opened. 6. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting OK. The entry is then created in the list. Renaming a list entry You can rename the individual list entries as many times as you want. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Manage lists. 4. Select the list you want. 5. Select the list entry you want. 6. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 7. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting OK. The name is now changed. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook Deleting a list entry You can delete each individual entry in a list. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Manage lists. 4. Select the list you want. 5. Select the list entry you want. 6. Select Delete. 7. Answer the question displayed by selecting Yes. The list entry is deleted. the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Manage lists. 4. Select the Driver list. 5. Select the driver you want. 6. Select Assign key. If the key is already assigned to another driver, you are informed of this at this point. The exist-
ing key assignment is discarded once you con-
firm this prompt. 7. Confirm the prompt by selecting Yes. The key is assigned to the driver. The assign-
ment is now also shown in the list. Assigning the current key to a driver in the driver list You can assign the key currently being used to a driver in the list. If this key is used again when the logbook is acti-
vated, the logbook recognises the driver and au-
tomatically records his or her name. Deleting an existing key assignment You can delete an existing key assignment again. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.
> Manage lists. 4. Select the Driver list. 5. Select the driver you want. 6. Select Delete key. 7. Confirm the prompt by selecting Yes. The assignment is deleted again. Deleting trips You can either delete the trips already transferred from your logbook or all recorded trips. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET logbook
> Delete trips. Deleting trips already transferred 4. Select Transferred trips. 5. Confirm by selecting Yes. All trips already transferred are deleted. CAR 123 Deleting all trips 5. Select All trips. 6. Confirm by selecting Yes. All trips are deleted. Transferring the logbook data Depending on how your PCM is equipped, you can transfer stored data via either the Bluetooth in-
terface or the USB interface. The data is not delet-
ed during this process. We recommend that you transfer and back up the data at regular intervals. Transferring data via the USB interface You can only access the To USB transmis-
sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-
tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section Notes on the me-
dia supported on page 43. 4. Select To USB. The data is transferred, provided there is a storage medium without write protection and with sufficient free memory connected. Otherwise you are notified of the problem with the data transfer by means of an error mes-
sage. 6. A list of all known devices that may be used for a transfer of logbook data is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press New de-
vice (see also the section Adding a new Blue-
tooth device on page 125). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-
taining the devices found is displayed. 7. Select the device you want in the list. The data is transferred. You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 125. The name of the file where the transferred log-
book data is stored is made up of the abbre-
viation FB, the date (YYMMDD) and the ex-
tension .bin. Please note that multiple logbooks trans-
ferred on the same day will overwrite each other without notice. Transferring data via the Bluetooth interface Please note that the connection between both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth. To find out how to activate this connection, please refer to the section Switching Bluetooth on on page 125. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Transfer data. 5. Select To Bluetooth. 124 CAR Bluetooth settings Calling up Bluetooth settings 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Logbook
> Transfer data
> Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth on Select Switch on Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth off Select Switch off Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Adding a new Bluetooth device For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. 1. Select New data device in the Bluetooth settings. A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed. 2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM To find out more, please refer to the section Es-
tablishing a connection from an external Blue-
tooth device on page 69. Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section Set-
ting visibility on page 69. Authorised Bluetooth devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-
ised data devices
. Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring the logbook. Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting settings. Yes. CAR 125 Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address as well as the supported services. 126 CAR The functions of the Sport display can be used for any route (e.g. journey to work), not just laps. Any recorded lap/distance can be defined as a ref-
erence lap. This then forms the basis for compar-
ing further laps/routes and recorded times. Laps/
distances whose length differs by more than 15 percent (longer or shorter) from the reference dis-
tance will be marked in the evaluation. The Sport display The Sport display is part of the Sport Chrono Package Plus that also includes a stopwatch and buttons for dynamic driving settings (Sport mode). The combination of the stopwatch and the PCM al-
lows lap data to be recorded and evaluated. The time is recorded by the stopwatch operated using the CHRONO on-board computer menu in the instrument cluster. Refer also to the section Chrono in the vehicle operating manual. The graphical display as well as the storage and evaluation of the recorded lap times and the asso-
ciated lap lengths is performed by the PCM. The following information can be recorded and dis-
played for each driven lap:
the route, the fastest lap time and in comparison the cur-
rent lap time, a comparison of the current lap and the fastest lap so far, the portion of the lap already covered and the distance or number of laps possible with the remaining fuel. Starting recording As soon as the stopwatch in the CHRONO on-
board computer menu is started, recording be-
gins along with recording of the route, which is shown on the display. You can see the following in the display:
a white line representing the reference lap, a destination flag marking the start of record-
ing, a yellow line representing your current lap as well as an orange dot representing the position of the vehicle on the route. CAR 127 Available memory is full If the available memory is full, a message to this effect appears in the display. The lap details will continue to be displayed, however the lap during which the message appears as well as any further laps will no longer be recorded. A maximum of 8 hours can be recorded. Stopping recording Selecting Stop in the on-board computer menu stops the stopwatch and therefore the recording in progress. The recorded data is stored. Continuing recording As soon as the stopwatch is restarted in the on-
board computer menu with Res., the Sport dis-
play appears again. This is only possible, however, if you do not reset the stopwatch in the on-board computer menu be-
forehand. The left half of the display shows a circle diagram. It indicates the distance covered in relation to a complete lap. The circle diagram assumes different colours de-
pending on whether the current lap is faster, as fast as or slower than the previous fastest lap:
green - current lap is faster, yellow - current lap is as fast, red - current lap is slower. The number in the centre of the coloured circle in-
dicates the current lap. If you have not loaded any reference laps, the first lap recorded will be used as a reference lap. Neither the remaining number of laps nor the fastest lap time is displayed while the first lap is being recorded. The circle diagram is not filled yet either. The route is only recorded when the display of Additional data is activated in the SET sport display. To find out more, please refer to the section Setting the display of additional data on page 132. The first lap of the recording is used as a refer-
ence lap if none has already been loaded. This is needed to display the circle diagram in the lap de-
tails as well as to display the remaining laps left in the tank. A maximum of 63 laps can be stored for each recording. Lap information The route is displayed when the Sport display is called up. You can then switch between the route and the lap details by selecting the symbols and or by turning the rotary knob q. This information consists of:
the time of the fastest lap, the current lap time, information on the remaining tank range (in re-
maining laps and as a distance) as well as the remaining memory available. 128 CAR Ending a lap/starting a new lap Selecting Round in the on-board computer menu ends one lap and starts a new lap. Timing the interval Selecting Int. in the on-board computer menu and then pressing the stalk forwards displays the interval for several seconds. Evaluating a recording 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol. 4. Select the recording you want. 5. Select Evaluation. The individual laps are shown side-by-side as bars in the evaluation that appears. The height of these bars represents the corresponding lap time. The higher the bar, the longer the lap time. You can scroll forward and backward in the evalu-
ation by:
Touching the symbols on the dis-
and play.
- or -
Turning the right rotary knob q. Reference lap If you did not define a reference lap when record-
ing started, the first lap is treated as the reference lap and is shown as Lap 1/R. Fastest lap The laps are generally displayed in orange. The only exception to this is the fastest lap, which is shown in white. Interrupted lap If a lap is shown with a broken bar, this means that either the driving was interrupted or the vehicle was stationary for a time. Parking periods result when the ignition is switched off. Implausible (divergent) laps are shown in grey. Implausible laps are shown in grey. Laps are re-
garded as implausible if their distance deviates more than 15% from the distance of the reference lap. CAR 129 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of Deleting a lap the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol. Deleting recordings individually 4. Select the recording you want. 5. Select Delete. 6. Confirm the prompt by selecting Yes. The recording is deleted. Deleting all recordings 4 Select a recording. 5. Select Delete.
> Delete list. 6. Confirm the prompt by selecting Delete all. You cannot delete the last lap using the Delete lap menu item while the Res. function can still be selected in the on-board computer menu. In this case, the stopwatch in the on-board computer must be reset and the lap deleted afterwards. To find out more, please refer to the section Deleting recordings on page 130. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the recording you want. 5. Select Evaluation. 6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation. 7. Select Delete lap. The lap is deleted from the recording. Renaming a recording 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol. 4. Select the recording you want. 5. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 6. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name is now changed. Deleting recordings You cannot delete a recording while the Res. function can be selected in the on-board computer menu. In order to be able to delete a recording, you must first reset the stopwatch in the on-board computer menu. 130 CAR Storing a lap as the reference lap 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the recording you want. 5. Select Evaluation. 6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation. 7. Select Store reference. The lap is stored as the reference lap. Defining the reference lap If no reference lap is defined in advance, the first lap in a recording is automatically used as the ref-
erence lap. Furthermore, any lap already recorded can be de-
fined as the reference lap for the next recording. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. The reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol. 4. Select the reference lap you want. 5. Select Set reference. The chosen reference lap is used for future re-
cordings. Resetting the defined reference lap 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Reset reference. The previously defined reference lap is re-
set. If no new reference lap is defined, the first lap is used again as the reference lap for any further recordings. Renaming the reference lap 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the reference lap you want. 5. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 6. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the reference lap is now changed. Deleting the reference lap 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Sport display
> Recordings. A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the reference lap you want. 5. Select Delete. 6. Confirm by selecting Yes. The recording is now deleted. CAR 131 3. Select Sport display
> Transfer data. A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the recording you want or the All list entry. Transferring data via the USB interface You can only access the To USB transmis-
sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-
tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section Notes on the me-
dia supported on page 43. A directory called SportChrono is created on the storage medium during data transfer. 5. Select To USB. The data is transferred, provided there is a storage medium without write protection and with sufficient free memory connected. Otherwise you are notified of the problem with the data transfer by means of an error mes-
sage. Transferring data via the Bluetooth interface Please note that the connection between both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth. To find out how to activate this connection, please refer to the section Switching Bluetooth on on page 133. 5. Select To Bluetooth. 6. A list of all known devices that may be used for a transfer of data is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press New device (see also the section Adding a new Bluetooth de-
vice on page 133). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-
taining the devices found is displayed. 7. Select the device you want. You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section Adding a new Bluetooth device on page 133. Deleting all laps This function can be used to delete all recordings and reference laps. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Select SET sport display. 4. Delete trips. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Setting the display of additional data 1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 3. Select SET CAR
> SET sport display. 4. Select Additional data to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Transferring data We recommend that you transfer and back up the data at regular intervals. 1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 132 CAR Bluetooth settings Calling up Bluetooth settings 1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 3. Select Sport display
> Transfer data
> Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth on Select Switch on Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth off Select Switch off Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Adding a new Bluetooth device For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. 1. Select New data device in the Bluetooth settings. A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed. 2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. Authorised Bluetooth devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-
ised data devices
. Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM To find out more, please refer to the section Es-
tablishing a connection from an external Blue-
tooth device on page 69. Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section Set-
ting visibility on page 69. Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring the data from the Sport display. Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. CAR 133 Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address as well as the supported services. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting settings. Yes. Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. 134 CAR Setting light options Setting the daytime running lights If the Daytime Run. Lights function is active (
), the lights will always be switched on when the en-
gine is running. This applies regardless of the light switch setting. The illumination of the instruments and switches is still switched on and off via the light switch, re-
gardless of the Daytime Run. Lights setting. This function is only available in countries where daytime running lights are not mandatory. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Exterior lights. 4. Select Daytime Run. Lights to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Extended memory In the PCM menu you have the option to store var-
ious settings for up to three of your vehicles igni-
tion keys and two of your vehicles memory but-
tons. Both driver-related settings from the instru-
ment cluster as well as PCM settings are stored in this process. The following PCM settings are stored:
the personal data fields of the trip data in the w main menu, the stations stored on the station buttons of the various preset memories in radio mode, the sound settings for the various audio sourc-
es, the volume settings for the various audio sources, settings for the map view as well as the settings for voice control. The vehicle-dependent settings are described in the following sections. To find out more about the extended memory, please refer also to the corresponding chapter in the owners manual. The range of vehicle settings available in the PCM depends on the vehicle type and the equipment installed. Setting the fade-out time for the exterior lights of the vehicle You can set a fade-out time of between 10 and 120 seconds for your vehicles exterior lights. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Exterior lights
> Fade-out time. 4. Set the time period you want by touching the or by turning the right two symbols rotary knob t. The setting is immediately applied. and The Fade-out time setting also changes the illu-
mination duration when unlocking the vehicle. To find out more about this, please refer to the chapter Welcome home function in the owners manual. CAR 135 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Interior lights
> Orientation light. 4. Set the intensity you want by touching the two or by turning the right ro-
symbols and tary knob t. The setting is immediately applied. Setting the fade-out time for the interior lights of the vehicle You can set a fade-out time of between 0 and 300 seconds for your vehicles interior lights. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Interior lights
> Fade-out time. 4. Set the time period you want by touching the or by turning the right two symbols rotary knob t. The setting is immediately applied. and Setting wiper options You can choose whether you want to switch on your vehicles windscreen wipers yourself or whether they should be controlled automatically. Setting activation of the rain sensor 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Wiper
> Rain sensor. 4. Select Automatic if the rain sensor is to be permanently active as soon as the wiper switch is set to intermittent mode.
- or -
4 Select Manual if the rain sensor is to be started manually. Setting the alignment for the low beam You can set the alignment of the low beam head-
lights for driving on the right or left. You can only change this function when the vehicle is stationary. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Exterior lights
> Low beams. 4. Select Standard to adapt the headlights to the normal direction of traffic in the delivery country.
- or -
4 Select Inverted to adapt the headlights to the other direction of traffic. Setting the orientation light The orientation lighting include the lights in the area of the roof console, the inner door handles and the storage compartments. You can set the intensity of the orientation light on a scale from 0 to 10. 136 CAR Setting activation of the rear wiper 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Wiper
> Rear wiper. 4. Select Automatic if the rear wiper is to be switched on automatically. This happens as soon as reverse gear is engaged and the front wiper has been active during the previous 40 seconds.
- or -
4 Select Manual if the rear wiper is to be start-
ed manually. Setting reversing options Setting lowering of the right exterior mirror You can set whether the right exterior mirror is to be lowered automatically and the direction indica-
tor is to be operated when reverse gear is en-
gaged. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Reversing options. 4. Select Lower mirror to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Setting opening of the rear blind You can set whether the rear blind is to be opened automatically when reverse gear is engaged. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Light & visibility
> Reversing options. 4. Select Open rear blind to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Setting comfort options Setting automatic folding in the exterior mirrors You can set whether the exterior mirrors are to be folded in automatically when the vehicle is switched off. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Locking system. 4. Select Fold in mirror to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Activating the entry aid If this function is activated, the steering wheel and drivers seat are retracted automatically to make it easier to get in and out of the vehicle. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Locking system. 4. Select Entry aid to activate (
deactivate (
) the function.
) or CAR 137 Setting adaptation of the central vents If this function is activated, the output temperature at both central vents in the dashboard is adapted. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Air conditioning. 4. Select Center cooler to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Setting automatic air circulation If this function is activated, the fresh air supply is shut off and the air circulation function is activated if the air quality is poor. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Air conditioning. 4. Select Auto recir. air to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Choosing the options for setting the air conditioning Setting the air flow strength You can choose whether the air flow for the air conditioning is to be set to Gentle, Normal or Strong. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Air conditioning
> Air flow. 4. Select the setting you want. Setting use of the upper ventilation zone If this function is activated, the upper ventilation zone is also taken into account for the automatic air conditioning system. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET CAR
> Vehicle functions
> Air conditioning. 4. Select Ventilation zone to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. 138 CAR General operation .......................................140 Navigation safety notice............................141 Setting the volume of the navigation announcement..........................141 Repeating a navigation announcement .......141 Entering an address....................................141 Entering the country .................................142 Entering the town/postal code...................142 Entering the street/number .......................142 Entering the junction.................................143 Starting/stopping route guidance.................143 Starting route guidance ............................143 Stopping route guidance...........................143 Activating alternative routes for route guidance.........................................143 Starting route guidance with route alternatives activated................................143 Displaying information for traffic messages on the route.............................143 List of previous destinations ........................144 Entering an address for a new route guidance session from the list...................145 Displaying the location of a destination.......145 Editing the address of a destination ...........145 Deleting...................................................145 Storing a destination in the personal destination memory..................................145 Calling the destination...............................146 Personal destination memory.......................146 Storing an address for personal destinations................................146 Entering an address for route guidance from the list .............................................147 Displaying the location of a destination.......147 Editing the address of a destination ...........147 Adding destinations ..................................147 Entering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the destination memory .....148 Editing the destination name......................148 Calling the destination...............................148 Deleting a destination ...............................148 Bluetooth settings ..................................149 Points of interest ........................................151 Searching for points of interest by category .............................................151 Searching for points of interest by name ....152 Searching for points of interest by telephone number ....................................152 Searching for points of interest in the map view ...........................................152 Starting navigation to the point of interest ..153 Changing options for route guidance ............153 Setting a detour .......................................153 Cancelling a detour...................................154 Setting a fast/quick route .........................154 Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) ........154 Avoiding a stretch of road .........................155 Stopovers (tour)..........................................155 Entering stopovers ..................................155 Via destinations ........................................156 Deleting stopovers ...................................157 NAVI Storing stopovers in the personal destination memory ..................................157 Reorganising the stopovers.......................157 Destination input using geographical coordinates ................................................158 Destination input using the map....................158 Storing.......................................................158 Storing a destination.................................158 Storing a position .....................................159 Off-road navigation......................................159 Activating/deactivating off-road navigation..160 Safety notice for off-road navigation...........160 Landmark navigation.................................160 Recording a trip section (trace)..................161 Tracing a route.........................................163 Reloading data............................................164 Changing the navigation database..............164 NAVI 139 NAVIGeneral operation The PCM navigation system utilises visual and au-
dible driving recommendations to help you reach your destination. The vehicles position is determined with the aid of a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation module. The vehicle position is calculated by evaluating and processing additional vehicle signals
(e.g. speed) in the navigation computer. This ena-
bles the system to automatically correct signal changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre diam-
eter), temperature or air pressure variations. The PCM features a hard drive where the digital map data is stored. If an area on this hard drive is damaged or corrupt, the PCM can no longer access the data on it. A message to this effect will be displayed. During an active telephone call, the driving recommendations are suppressed. WARNING!
Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver and makes recommendations on the routes to take. This does not release you from full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle. As the driver, you must assess the traffic situ-
ation. You have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car. Continue to pay attention to the traffic situ-
ation. To ensure you make the most effective use of your PCM navigation system, please observe the fol-
lowing points:
GPS reception can be impaired under trees or between high buildings. No GPS reception is possible in multi-storey car parks, tunnels and the like. The GPS antenna must not be covered by me-
tallic or damp objects. After the vehicles on-board voltage has been interrupted (e.g. for changing the vehicle bat-
tery), it can take up to 15 minutes or more de-
pending on the reception conditions for the GPS to re-initialise. After transporting the vehicle, for example by ferry, it can take several minutes depending on the reception conditions after switching on un-
til the current GPS position is established. Without GPS reception, the system calculates the current position using the vehicle signals and therefore remains operational in situations where the reception is temporarily poor. High wheel slip (spin on snow) can result in an incorrect position being given for a short time. After initial start-up of the navigation system, the fine calibration requires approx. 50 km
(30 miles). After a tyre change (e.g. summer/winter tyres), fine calibration will only be reached after up to 50 km (30 miles). During fine calibration, full location accuracy is not yet reached. 140 NAVI Setting the volume of the navigation announcement 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Guidance volume. 4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two symbols and
. Navigation safety notice Repeating a navigation announcement You are shown a message that the navigation sys-
tem is only intended as an aid to the driver as soon as you:
have switched on the PCM and activated route guidance or have switched on the PCM and pressed the f button or g button for the first time. Close the safety notice by selecting Confirm. After you have listened to the navigation an-
nouncement, press the g button twice in succession. The navigation announcement is repeated. While the navigation announcement is being repeated, you can adjust the volume of the navigation announcement by turning the left rotary knob t. The changed volume is set and stored. Entering an address After you select Enter address, the address of the last destination is displayed in the information area. If route guidance is active, the address of the cur-
rent destination is displayed. Observe the following points for destination in-
put:
Destination input is only possible using the data available on the hard drive of the de-
vice. There may be restrictions regarding street names, street numbers, city centres and points of interest. This applies particularly if the destination is located in a partly digi-
tised area (map data for this area is inaccu-
rate or incomplete). We are constantly working to collect further data and update available data. Information regarding new or updated software is avail-
able from your Porsche partner. NAVI 141 3. Enter the town name or the postal code. After you enter the first letters of the town and confirm by selecting OK, a list containing possible matches is opened. 4. Select the town you want in the list.
- or -
4. Highlight a town in the list and select Details in the header. A map section containing the previously high-
lighted town is opened. If there are several towns with this name, you can switch between the different map views by touching the sym-
bols on the display. and 5. Select OK to use the town displayed in the map section for route guidance. Entering the street/number 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Enter address
> Street/no.. The input menu is opened. Selecting a country in the map 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Enter address
> Country. A list of the countries for which navigation data is stored on the hard drive is opened.
> Select Country via map. A map of Europe is opened. 3. Touch the upper or lower map section depend-
ing on the country you want to choose. An enlarged map section containing the rele-
vant country abbreviations is displayed. 4. Select the country you want in the map. Entering the town/postal code You can enter the town either by means of its name or its postal code. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Enter address
> Town/postal code. The input menu is opened. Entering the country After you first select address entry, only the Country menu item can be selected. You must enter a country before you can enter the remain-
ing address data. Selecting a country in the list 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Enter address
> Country. A list of the countries for which navigation data is stored on the hard drive is opened. 3. Select the country you want in the list. 142 NAVI 3. Enter the street name. After you enter the first letters of the street name, a list containing possible matches is opened. 4. Select the street you want in the list. You can also enter the street number later
(when route guidance is already active). If you do so, however, you must then restart route guidance. Entering the junction 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Enter address
> Junction. The input menu is opened. 3. Enter the name of the cross street. After you enter the first letters of the street name, a list containing possible matches is opened. 4. Select the street you want in the list. Starting/stopping route guidance Starting route guidance with route alternatives activated Starting route guidance To be able to start route guidance, you must have entered at least a country and a town. After entering the address data, select Start route guidance to start route guidance. Stopping route guidance Select Stop route guidance in the main menu during an active route guidance session to stop route guidance. Activating alternative routes for route guidance 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI. 4. Select Route alternatives to activate (
deactivate (
) the function. If you have activated the route alternatives in the settings menu, the Start route guidance menu item is replaced with the Calculate routes menu item. 1. Enter an address. 2. Select Calculate routes. The route alternatives are calculated. Any stop-
overs and via destinations that you have en-
tered are also taken into account in the calcu-
lation. The possible alternative routes are displayed. 3. Choose the route you want for the calculation 4. Select Start route guidance to start the route by selecting it. guidance. Displaying information for traffic messages on the route
) or If the Detour prompt function is activated, infor-
mation is displayed for each traffic message that is on the current route NAVI 143 List of previous destinations This list automatically stores the previous 100 destinations for which you started route guidance. Points of interest are indicated by symbols. Point of interest To find out more, please refer to the section Points of interest on page 151. Geographical coordinate To find out more, please refer to the section Destination input using ge-
ographical coordinates on page 158. Point positioning To find out more, please refer to the section Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning) on page 156. You can call up, edit and store the destinations for a new route guidance session. Select Details. The detailed view of the traffic message is dis-
played.
> Select Detour to close the detailed view and calculate a new route.
- or -
> Press the Back button h to close the detailed view again and ignore the traffic message.
) or You can also close the message or detailed view at any time by pressing any button. and that is at least 10 minutes before the last pos-
sible exit before the traffic jam. Detour prompt can only be activated if dy-
namic route planning is deactivated. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI. 4. Select Detour prompt to activate (
deactivate (
) the function. A prompt must be confirmed as soon as it is dis-
played. The following options are available to you:
Select Detour. A new route is calculated taking the relevant traffic message into account. Select Ignore. The original route guidance session is re-
sumed. The traffic message is not taken into account. 144 NAVI 4. Select Details. The location of the chosen destination is shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section Map display on page 166. 5. Select Start route guidance to start the route guidance if needed. Editing the address of a destination 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Address. The address entry menu is opened. 5. Make the changes you want. Deleting 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Delete. Entering an address for a new route guidance session from the list 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Start route guidance to start the route guidance. Displaying the location of a destination 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. Deleting a destination from the list 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The chosen destination is deleted from the list. Deleting the entire list 5. Select Delete list
> Delete all. The entire list is deleted. Storing a destination in the personal destination memory Storing of destinations in the list of previous desti-
nations takes place automatically. If all the memo-
ry locations are full, the PCM automatically deletes the oldest entry from the list. If you want to keep a destination permanently available, you can store it in your personal destina-
tion memory under a name of your choice. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Store. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the destination name you want and con-
firm by selecting OK. The destination is stored in the personal desti-
nation memory. NAVI 145 Points of interest are indicated by symbols. POI To find out more, please refer to the section Points of interest on page 151. Geo. co-ordinates To find out more, please refer to the section Destination input using ge-
ographical coordinates on page 158. Point positioning To find out more, please refer to the section Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning) on page 156. Stopovers (tour) To find out more, please refer to the section Stopovers (tour) on page 155. Trace To find out more, please refer to the section Off-road navigation on page 159. Landmark list To find out more, please refer to the section Off-road navigation on page 159. Storing an address for personal destinations Here is an example of how to enter the address for the personal destination GO HOME:
1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select GO HOME. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears with Yes. Storing an address by entering it 5. Select Enter address. 6. If applicable, select Country and select the country you want in the list. 7. Select the Town/postal code and Street/no. menu items one after the other and enter the appropriate details in the input menu. 8. Select Store to store the entered address for the entry. Calling the destination You can call individual points of interest for which there is a telephone number in the database from the list of previous destinations. This menu item is not available if there is no telephone number stored in the database for a destination or if the telephone function is not available. Store posi-
tion is displayed instead. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Call. The number stored in the database is dialled. Personal destination memory In your personal destination memory you can store 100 destination entries as well as 15 off-
road navigation routes (traces) under freely de-
fined names. The personal destination memory also contains the two personal destinations GO HOME and GO TO OFFICE that can be assigned the corresponding addresses and are always dis-
played at the top of the list. 146 NAVI Inserting an address from a list Displaying the location of a destination Adding destinations 5. Select Previous destinations or Stored desti-
nations. 6. Select the address you want in the list. The address is accepted. It is not possible to store a tour, a trace or a landmark list as a personal destination. Adding an address from a POI search 5. Select POI. For the rest of the procedure, please refer to the section Points of interest on page 151. Entering an address for route guidance from the list 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Start route guidance to start the route guidance. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Details. The location of the chosen destination is shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section Map display on page 166. 5. Select Start route guidance to start the route guidance if needed. Editing the address of a destination 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Address. The address entry menu is opened. 5. Make the changes you want. 6. Select Accept. 7. The old data is overwritten. Traces cannot be added with this menu item. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select Add destinations. Adding addresses by address entry 4. Select Enter address. 5. If applicable, select Country and select the country you want in the list. 6. Select the Town/postal code and Street/no. menu items one after the other and enter the appropriate details in the input menu. 7. Select Store to store the entered address for the entry. Adding destinations by loading from a USB 4. Select Load from USB. The data is transferred. You can only access the Load from USB transmission mode if there is a USB memory stick attached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section Notes on the media supported on page 43. NAVI 147 5. Make the change you want and confirm by The personal destination memory is opened. Deleting a destination 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Delete. Deleting a destination from the list 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The chosen destination is deleted from the list. Deleting the entire list 5. Select Delete list
> Delete all. The entire personal destination memory is deleted. Deletion also affects the two per-
sonal destinations GO HOME and GO TO OFFICE. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Destination name. The input menu is opened. selecting OK. Calling the destination You can store a telephone number for destinations held in the personal destination memory. This menu item is not available if the telephone function is not available or if you have not stored a tele-
phone number for the destination. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Call. The number stored in the database is dialled. Telephone numbers are also stored for the points of interest held on the hard drive. If, for example, you select a point of interest in the map view, you can establish a telephone con-
nection by selecting Call in the detailed view of the map view. To find out more, please refer also to the sec-
tion Searching for points of interest in the map view on page 152. Entering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the destination memory In the personal destination memory you can cre-
ate a telephone number for each destination for standard navigation. You cannot enter or edit a telephone number if the destination you want is a trace or a point of inter-
est (destinations for off-road navigation). 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Telephone number. The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. 5. Enter the number you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. Editing the destination name The two personal destinations GO HOME and GO TO OFFICE cannot be renamed. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 148 NAVI Sending a destination via the Bluetooth interface Please note that the radio connection be-
tween both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth. To find out how to activate this radio connection, please refer to the section Switching Bluetooth on on page 149. 5. Select To Bluetooth. 6. The list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devic-
es. To do this, press New device (see also the section Points of interest on page 151). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-
taining the devices found is displayed. 7. Select the device you want. You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section Points of interest on page 151. Sending a destination You can send individual destinations from the per-
sonal destination memory as a text message in the form of a vCard or via the Bluetooth inter-
face. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the destination you want. 4. Select Edit
> Send. Sending a destination via USB You can only access the To USB transmis-
sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-
tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section Notes on the me-
dia supported on page 43. 5. Select To USB. The data is transferred. Sending a destination as a text message 5. If you choose As SMS, you must enter the tel-
ephone number of the recipient in the input menu that appears. You can also select the number from the phonebook by selecting the corresponding menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section Creating and sending a new text message on page 85. Bluetooth settings Calling up Bluetooth settings 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. 3. Select a destination. 4. Select Edit
> Send
> Bluetooth settings. The personal destination memory is opened. Switching Bluetooth on Select Switch on Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. Switching Bluetooth off Select Switch off Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings. NAVI 149 Adding a new Bluetooth device Authorised Bluetooth devices For the PCM to find your Bluetooth device, please ensure that the Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and set to visible. 1. Select New data device in the Bluetooth settings. A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed. 2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list. A Bluetooth code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth device. Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-
play. Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device To find out more, please refer to the section Es-
tablishing a connection from an external Blue-
tooth device on page 69. Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section Set-
ting visibility on page 69. 150 NAVI This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth devices currently authorised to con-
nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-
ised data devices
. Displaying authorised Bluetooth devices Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. Connecting an authorised Bluetooth device with the PCM Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for exam-
ple when transferring a stored destination. Renaming an authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Rename. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-
lecting OK. The name of the device is now changed in the PCM. Deleting an authorised Bluetooth device from the list 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth 2. Select the device you want in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting settings. Yes. Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth devices 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Delete list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Delete all. Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth device 1. Select List of data devices in the Bluetooth settings. 2. Select any device in the list. 3. Select Device details. The following information is displayed:
the device name, the Bluetooth address as well as the supported services. Points of interest Points of interest are petrol stations, car parks, restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for example. They are divided into different categories to make them easier for you to find. This function is also available in reduced form in the i menu of the map view:
when route guidance is active under the Search on route menu item, when route guidance is not active under the Search surroundings menu item. Searching for points of interest by category 1. Press the f button. 2. Select POI
> Category. A list of the available categories is opened. 3. Select the category you want from the list. A list containing the subcategories is opened. 4. Select the subcategory you want. 5. You can also restrict the search area if you wish after selecting Search radius:
Vehicle surroundings The search is performed in the vicinity of the current location. Near destination The search is performed in the vicinity of the currently active destination. Along route The search is performed along the calculat-
ed route. Free location input The search is performed in a user-defined lo-
cation. You can enter this location in the in-
put menu. The Near destination and Along route menu items are only available during an active route guidance session after the route has been calculated. 6. Select the search area you want. 7. Start the search by selecting Show results. A list containing the search result is displayed. If you chose Free location input as the search area, you can expand the radius for a new search by selecting the Area search menu item in the result list. The result lists for the Vehicle surroundings and Near destination search areas show the distance as the crow flies, while the result list for the Along route search area shows the actual distance. You can set alphabetical sorting for the Near destination search area by selecting the first list entry, Alphabetical list. 8. Select the point of interest you want. If you fill a data field with the Distance to next petrol station menu item in the personal dis-
play of the CAR menu, you can start a route calculation to this petrol station by touching the symbol in the data field. To find out more, please refer to the section Setting the contents of the personal display on page 113. NAVI 151 Searching for points of interest by telephone number 1. Press the f button. 2. Select POI. 3. Select Telephone number. The input menu is opened. 4. Enter the telephone number with country code
(without + or 00) and confirm by selecting OK. If there is more than one address stored for the telephone number you have just entered, a list of the addresses is opened. 5. Select the address you want if necessary. Searching for points of interest in the map view 1. Touch the map view. A crosshair is displayed. 2. Briefly touch the symbol for the point of inter-
est in the map view. An orange-coloured ring appears around the point of interest and the name of the point of interest and the Details menu are displayed in the header. Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-
tary knob u or touching the Details menu in the header. You can also view the details for a traffic mes-
sage or destination flag shown on the display by touching them. Searching for points of interest by name 1. Press the f button. 2. Select POI. 3. Specify Category and Search radius if appli-
cable. 4. Select Name. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the first letters of the name of the point of interest. After you enter the first letters of the name, a list containing possible matches is opened. If there are fewer than five points of interest stored for the selected category and search area, a list of the points of interest is opened instead of the input menu. 6. Select the point of interest you want in the list. 152 NAVI Starting navigation to the point of interest Setting a detour from the current position 1. Press the f button. 2. Select POI.
- or -
Touch the map view. 3. Select the point of interest you want. 4. Select Start route guidance. The route is calculated and route guidance started. Changing options for route guidance The options for route guidance are also avail-
able to you in the map view. Setting a detour To be able to set a detour, you must have activat-
ed the route guidance component of your naviga-
tion system. If you set a number of detours, they always refer to the current route. Older route calculations are discarded. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options
> Detour
> Distance ahead. The map view is displayed. You can see your current position as well as the route ahead. 4. Switch from one part of the route section to and the next by selecting the two symbols or by turning t the right rotary knob. 5. Select Detour once you have set the part of the route up to where you want to activate a detour. symbol is The new route is calculated. The displayed before the Distance ahead menu item. Setting an alternative route 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options
> Detour
> Show alt. routes. The map view is displayed. You can see your current route. The current route guidance session is aborted. 4. You can show alternative route suggestions in the map view by selecting Route 1, Route 2 or Scenic route. 5. Select Start route guidance to accept one of these routes after highlighting it. If you exit the menu by pressing the h button, the previously active route guidance is resumed and detours already set are discard-
ed. NAVI 153 Making a detour around route sections Cancelling a detour 4. Activate or deactivate the route option you want by selecting it. Short route Calculates the shortest route to the destina-
tion. Quick route Calculates the fastest route to the destina-
tion. Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) If you have activated dynamic route planning, the traffic messages broadcast by the radio stations are taken into consideration when calculating the route. To find out more about traffic messages, please refer to the section Displaying traffic messages
(TMC) on page 109. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options. 4. Select Dynamic reroute or deactivate (
) the function. to activate (
) The list of route sections shows the individual sec-
tions of the calculated route. The section you are currently driving on when you call up the list ap-
pears at the top of the list. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options
> Detour
> Route sections. The list of route sections is displayed. 4. Select the route section you want. A list containing the parts of this route section is displayed. 5. Select the parts to activate (
) or deactivate (
) them. 6. Press the Back button h or the f button to activate the detour. 7. The detour is then set. This is indicated by the symbol in front of the Route sections menu item. symbol is no longer displayed and a new Selecting Detour off cancels all previously set detours. The route is calculated. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options
> Detour
> Detour off. All blocks are cancelled. Setting a fast/quick route These two route options allow you to influence how the route is calculated. You can set or change the route options before the route is calculated or during route guidance. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options. 154 NAVI Avoiding a stretch of road
), the PCM calculates symbol Selecting Avoid allows you to set restrictions for route planning. If a restriction is activated (
a route without this type of road. The is displayed before the Avoid menu item. If route planning is not possible with the restriction you have set, you are informed of this in an appro-
priate message. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route options
> Avoid. The following menu items are then available for you to select:
Toll
, Motorway
, Ferry / Car train Tunnel and Mountain passes
.
, 4. Select the respective menu items to activate
) or deactivate (
(
The route is recalculated.
) the function. Stopovers (tour) You can enter up to four stopovers during an ac-
tive navigation session and arrange them in any or-
der. The route is recalculated and the destinations are then called at in a so-called tour. As soon as a stopover is approached as an active destination, it is also displayed in the list of previ-
ous destinations. The complete tour is displayed in the form of a list of destinations. The currently active destination is at the top of the list. The main destination of the tour is indicated by a black and white destination flag and is the last entry in the list. If the active navigation session is an off-road session, the Stopovers and As stopover menu items are replaced with the List of land-
marks and As landmark menu items. To find out more about off-road navigation, please refer to the section Off-road naviga-
tion on page 159. Entering stopovers By entering an address 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> Enter address. The address input menu is opened. 4. Enter the address you want. 5. Select Accept. If you have already entered at least one stopo-
ver, a destination list is opened where you can define the position of the stopover you are in the process of entering. 6. Position the stopover by selecting the empty list entry at the position you want in the list. From the list of previous destinations 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> Previous destinations. The list of previous destinations is opened. 4. Select the destination you want. The destination is accepted as a stopover. NAVI 155 Entering a stopover using geographical coordinates Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning) 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> Adv. destination input
> Geo. co-ordinates. An input menu for geographical coordi-
nates is opened. 4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want and confirm by selecting OK. Entering a stopover using the map 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> Adv. destination input
> Destination via map. The map view is displayed. 4. Set the destination you want by touching the map and confirm by selecting OK. 1. Touch the map view when route guidance is un-
derway. A crosshair is displayed. 2. Touch the symbol for a point of interest or any other point in the map view. The name of the point of interest or the ad-
dress of the chosen point is displayed in the header. 3. Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-
tary knob u or by touching the header. 4. Select As stopover. The chosen destination is stored in the destina-
tion list as point positioning and indicated with the symbol. Via destinations If you have selected a motorway junction as a stopover, this stopover is interpreted as a via des-
tination. As soon as a stopover is approached as an active destination, the via destination is also displayed in the list of previous destinations. No estimated time of arrival is given for via desti-
nations. From the destination memory 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 4. Select the destination you want. The destination is accepted as a stopover. Entering a point of interest as a stopover 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Add
> POI. The POI search is opened. 4. Select the point of interest you want. The destination is accepted as a stopover. To find out more about the POI search, please refer to the section Points of interest on page 151. 156 NAVI Storing stopovers in the personal destination memory You can store all stopovers entered as well as the main destination individually in the personal desti-
nation memory. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Store. The destination list is opened. 4. Select the destination you want to store in the list. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the name you want for the destination and confirm by selecting OK. The destination is stored in the personal desti-
nation memory under the entered name. Deleting stopovers 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Delete. The destination list is opened. Deleting a destination from the list 4. Select the destination to be deleted in the list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The destination is deleted from the list. Deleting the entire list 4. Select a stopover in the list. 5. Select Delete list. 6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. The entire list apart from the main destination is deleted and route guidance is resumed to the main destination. Reorganising the stopovers 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Stopovers
> Sort new. igate to them. 4. Select the entries in the order you want to nav-
You can end the reorganisation without completing it by selecting the Back button h. The stopovers not yet reorganised are then appended in their current position to those already sorted. Once you have reorganised all the stopovers, the list is automatically closed and route guid-
ance to the new active destination started. NAVI 157 Storing This menu item allows you to store both a destina-
tion and your current position. You can also access this function in the i menu in the map view. Storing a destination If route guidance is currently active, you can store either the destination or the entire route depend-
ing on the type of route guidance in your personal destination memory. The menu item provided here is tailored to the respective situation. The following options are available:
Store destination is displayed during route guidance to an ad-
dress, a geographical coordinate or a point of interest. Store tour is displayed during route guidance to a stopo-
ver or to the main destination in a tour. Store landmarks is displayed when off-road navigation is active when tracing a landmark navigation session. Destination input using the map You can use the map view for destination input as an alternative to entering an address. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Adv. destination input
> Destination via map. The map view is displayed. 4. Set the destination you want by touching the map. 5. Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-
tary knob u or touching the Details menu in the header. 6. Select Start route guidance. 7. The route is calculated and route guidance started. Destination input using geographical coordinates If you know the geographical coordinates for a destination, you can use them for destination in-
put. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Adv. destination input
> Geo. co-ordinates. An input menu is opened. 4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want and confirm by selecting OK. 5. Select Start route guidance. The route is calculated and route guidance started. 158 NAVI 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Store. 4. Select the menu item shown (e.g. Store desti-
nation). The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-
vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing OK. Storing a position You can store your current position in your person-
al destination memory as a geographical coordi-
nate by selecting Store position. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Store. 4. Select Store position. The input menu is opened. 5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-
vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing OK. Off-road navigation Off-road navigation allows you to navigate in non-
digitised areas (no digital map data available for this area on the hard drive). Observe the applicable regulations in the country in which you are driving. Driving a ve-
hicle off official roads is not permissible in all countries. Off-road navigation is generally performed only with the aid of direction arrows and simple naviga-
tion announcements. Even when you are driving on a road available in the digital map data on the hard drive, route guidance is via direction arrows only. Off-road navigation works best when the vehicle is located a significant distance (> 100 m (approx. 330 feet)) from the digitised road network. Display during off-road navigation The following information is displayed during an active off-road navigation session:
A compass display with a vehicle symbol in the centre of the compass rose. The direction to the next landmark (stopover) symbolised by an orange-coloured direction ar-
row. The directional deviation from the ideal route is symbolised by an orange-coloured arc seg-
ment. The distance as the crow flies to the next land-
mark (stopover). Arrival time during off-road navigation During off-road navigation, the arrival time displayed in the w menu and elsewhere is cal-
culated based on an assumed average speed of 36 km/h (approx. 22 mph). NAVI 159 Safety notice for off-road navigation When you activate off-road navigation you are shown a notice that off-road navigation serves only to assist the driver. Select Activate off-road to close this safety notice. Landmark navigation Within the framework of landmark navigation you can enter a destination by entering an address
(> page 141), enter a destination by specifying the geograph-
ical coordinates (> page 158), enter a destination in the map view
(> page 156), insert a destination from the list of previous destinations
(> page 144), insert a destination from the personal destina-
tion memory (> page 146), enter a point of interest (> page 151) and enter a maximum of four stopovers, in this case termed Landmarks (> page 155). Destinations in the digitised area can also be se-
lected from lists and navigated to when off-road navigation is active. These destinations are then reinterpreted as off-
road destinations and navigated to using landmark navigation. Determination of the vehicle position during off-road navigation The vehicle position is determined with the aid of a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation module. GPS stands for Global Positioning Sys-
tem and is a satellite-assisted position tracking system. Further vehicle signals (e.g. speed) are evaluated and processed in the navigation computer to cal-
culate the vehicle position. This enables the system to automatically correct signal changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre diameter), temperature or air pressure variations. Activating/deactivating off-road navigation 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Off-road. 4. Select Off-road to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Off-road navigation is automatically activated when you select an off-road destination (a landmark list or a trace) from the destination memory. 160 NAVI During off-road navigation, only individual des-
tinations (landmarks) are stored in the list of previous destinations. Landmark lists can be stored in the personal destination memory. Route guidance in landmark navigation Route guidance is by means of a compass display with the vehicle symbol in the centre of the com-
pass rose. The orange-coloured direction arrow always points in the direction of the landmark currently being navigated to. The various landmarks are shown as coloured flags. The angular deviation between the current direc-
tion of travel and the direction to the next land-
mark is shown as an orange-coloured arc segment and indicated in degrees. Map view in landmark navigation The individual landmarks are shown as flags in the map view:
Orange-coloured flag: next landmark Blue flags: landmarks that have not yet been driven to Checked flag: the current destination land-
mark. The routes between the landmarks that have not yet been driven are shown with a blue line. If the route has not yet been covered in full, the portion of the line already covered is shown in or-
ange. Additionally, a compass is displayed at the top left to aid orientation. When a landmark is reached, the system outputs the message Landmark XX reached. Recording a trip section (trace) Off-road navigation allows you to record a section of a trip, even in non-digitised areas. This is done by setting navigation points (trace points). A section of this type is called a trace. Traces can be recorded in off-road mode while route guidance is active. You can record and store up to 15 traces in the personal destination memory. Traces are not stored in the list of previous destinations. NAVI 161 Starting recording Ending trace recording 1. When off-road navigation is activated, press 1. Press the f button while recording is un-
the f button. derway. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Off-road
> End trace. Storing a recording As soon as you end a trace recording you are asked whether this trace should be stored in the destination memory. 1. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting Yes. 2. The input menu is opened. A suggestion for a name is already provided in the input field. 3. Change the suggested name as you want and confirm your entry by selecting OK. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Off-road
> Record trace. 4. Select From start point if you want to start re-
cording from the start of the journey. Trace re-
cording is continued, starting from the current point. The data automatically stored from the beginning of the journey is transferred.
- or -
Select From current position if you want to start recording from the current position. The data automatically stored from the beginning of the journey is deleted. If you have already recorded a trace during the trip, deleted the trace or changed the grid for set-
ting the navigation points, you will only be able to record a new trace using the From current posi-
tion function. You can also access the Record trace and End trace functions in the option menu in the map view when off-road navigation is activat-
ed. Map view during trace recording During trace recording, the recorded route of the trace is shown as a blue line in the map view. Map view when following a trace When you drive a recorded trace, the route ahead is shown in the map in orange and the route al-
ready covered is shown in grey. 162 NAVI Setting the grid for automatic setting of the navigation points You can set the intervals at which the so-called trace points are set during trace recording:
Optimised The navigation system automatically gener-
ates a navigation point at geometrically practi-
cal locations in order to record the trace. The number of navigation points set by the sys-
tem depends on the frequency of the changes in direction. Set ... mls Here you define at what point in the driven route a navigation point is to be set during trace recording. The navigation points are set regardless of any changes in direction. Up to 1,000 trace points per trace are set during recording. The setting chosen when setting the points determines the maximum route that can be recorded. The memory remaining for the active recording is displayed in the map. 1. When off-road navigation is switched on, press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Off-road
> Off-road settings. 4. Select Recording mode. 5. Set the grid you want by selecting it. Setting trace points manually You can also set trace points manually during trace recording. 1. Press the f button while trace recording is underway. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Off-road
> Set trace point. Tracing a route You have various options when tracing routes, based on the trace direction (Trace forward and Trace backward) and trace point (From start point and From current position):
From start point, trace forwards:
You are directed to the start point of the re-
cording and drive the trace from the start point to the end point. From start point, trace backwards:
You are directed to the end point of the record-
ing and drive the trace from the end point to the start point. From current position, trace forwards:
You are directed to the closest point in the trace and drive the trace in the direction of the end point. From current position, trace backwards:
You are directed to the closest point in the trace and drive the trace in the direction of the start point. After starting navigation, you are navigated to the next navigation point. Route guidance is by means of a compass display with the vehicle symbol in the centre of the compass rose. NAVI 163 Reloading data Changing the navigation database If the selected destination lies outside of the cur-
rent navigation database, a route is calculated to a point that is close to the destination entered and is located within the database. Route guidance from this point is interpreted as off-road route guidance, as there is no map data available. If there is additional map data available on the PCM, this can be reloaded. If a selected destination lies outside of the current database and there is a geographical coordinate saved for this destination, route guidance to this destination can be started. 1. Press the f button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET NAVI
> Re-load data
> Database switch. A list of the available databases is opened. 4. Select the required database in the list. 5. Confirm the prompt that appears and perform the database search by selecting Yes. The orange-coloured arc segment points in the di-
rection of the navigation point currently being nav-
igated to. The angular deviation between the cur-
rent direction of travel and the direction to the next navigation point is shown as an orange-coloured segment. The angular deviation is indicated in de-
grees. 1. Press the f button. 2. Select Stored destinations. The personal destination memory is opened. 3. Select the trace you want in the list. 4. Select Start route guidance. If off-road navigation is not yet activated, the safety notice is displayed. 5. Confirm the safety notice with Activate off-
road if applicable to activate off-road naviga-
tion. 6. Select the direction of travel you want and the start point you want along the route to be driv-
en. Route guidance is started. 164 NAVI MAP Map display ............................................... 166 Changing the scale of the map.................. 166 Moving the map....................................... 166 Setting 3D display ................................... 166 Displaying traffic messages...................... 167 Setting the display of the total route.......... 167 Setting autozoom .................................... 167 Displaying destination/location info ........... 167 Operating the map menu using symbols .... 167 Displaying sections of the route ................ 168 Setting the display layout ......................... 168 Compiling map contents........................... 169 Basic voice control functions....................... 175 Setting the volume................................... 175 Map display 165 Moving the map You can move the map section shown on the dis-
play as you want. You have two options for doing this:
Briefly touch the display to move the map sec-
tion so that the centre point of the map is at the point you touched.
- or -
Touch and hold a point in the map view to keep moving the map in the direction of this point. The map will keep moving until you stop touch-
ing the screen. Setting 3D display If this function is activated, a three-dimensional map view is shown. 1. Press the g button. 2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r. 3. Select Birds-eye view to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. You can choose for yourself the content shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section Compiling map contents on page 169. You can also call up and operate the map view menu using symbols. To find out more, please refer to the section Operating the map menu using symbols on page 167. Changing the scale of the map The current scale is shown in the bottom right of the map in the map display. Set the map scale you want by turning the right rotary knob t. A number of map views also display the two sym-
bols Change the map scale you want by touching and
. the two symbols on the display. MAPMap display You call up the map view of the navigation system by pressing the g button. Your vehicle is shown in the map view as a triangu-
lar arrow. The arrowhead points in the direction of travel. The centre of the vehicle is represented by the black dot in the middle of the small triangle. The recommended driving route, streets, rivers, railroad tracks, wooded areas or lakes are dis-
played as coloured lines or areas. The detail depends on the map scale set. When route guidance is active, either the expected time of arrival or the remaining trip time in hours and distance from destination are displayed at the bottom of the display. You can switch back and forth between the two options by briefly touching the display. 166 Map display Displaying traffic messages Setting autozoom Operating the map menu using symbols When this function is activated, traffic information is also shown in the map view. 1. Press the g button. 2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r. 3. Select Show traffic to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Setting the display of the total route If you have activated this function, the total route from the vehicle position to the destination flag is displayed during route guidance. The map scale is automatically adapted. 1. Press the g button. 2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r. 3. Select Total route to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. If you have activated this function, the entire cur-
rent route section is displayed. As soon as you leave the current route section, the next route section is displayed in the map. The map scale is calculated and dynamically adapted according to the length of the new route section. 1. Press the g button. 2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r. 3. Select Autozoom to activate (
) or deactivate (
) the function. Displaying Destination/Location info When route guidance is active, selecting the Show destination or Show location function displays the relevant position in accordance with the zoom functions currently active. 1. Press the g button. 2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r. 3. Select Show destination. The destination town is displayed on the map. 4. If necessary, select Show location. The current location of the vehicle is displayed on the map. If you have activated the Map menu menu item in the map display, you can also operate the map menu functions by touching the corresponding symbols on the display. To find out more, please refer also to the section Compiling the map information on page 169. 1. Press the g button. 2. Touch the symbol for the map menu on the display. The following symbols are displayed:
Switch three-dimensional map view on/off Show/hide traffic messages Switch display of the total route on/off Switch autozoom on/off Switch between location map and destination map Map display 167 3. To activate or deactivate a menu item, briefly touch the menu item on the display. When menu items are activated, the corre-
sponding symbols are displayed in orange. Displaying sections of the route If you have started the route guidance component of your navigation system, a list containing all sec-
tions of your route will be displayed. 1. Press the g button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select Route list. The sections of your route are listed and dis-
played. The section you are currently driving on is at the very top of this list and the final destination at the very bottom. 4. Select the section you want for a more detailed view. You then see a map section showing the route section in question. 5. You can adjust the map scale by touching the and two symbols through the various sections by touching the symbols
, as well as scroll and
. 6. If you wish to detour around this section of your route, select Detour. To find out more about setting detours, please refer to the section Setting a detour on page 153. This function is also available under the Route list menu item in the d menu. If off-road navigation is activated, a restricted version of this function is available with so-
called landmark navigation. Setting the display layout You have four options for dividing the display while route guidance is active:
Full screen map The map is shown across the entire display. With guidance In addition to the relevant map section, the next driving instruction is shown in the right half of the display. With direction list In addition to the relevant map section, the next manoeuvre is shown with the help of pic-
tograms. With route preview In addition to the map section containing the current position, a further map section contain-
ing the route ahead is shown. 1. Press the g button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 168 Map display 3. Select SET MAP
> Map layout. The various options for the display layout are shown. 4. Select the layout you want. The chosen layout is set. Compiling map contents You can adapt the map view to your requirements by selecting various elements and settings. If you have activated the Junction zoom function and an upcoming driving manoeuvre is displayed in enlarged form, it is not possible to display another function such as Show destination at this point. Compiling the map information Birds-eye view Switching between different layouts If you choose the With guidance, With di-
rection list or With route preview layout, you can switch to the full-screen map by briefly touching the right half of the display. The driving instructions are then shown in a small window in the top left corner of the dis-
play. In the Full screen map layout, you can switch to the previously set split screen layout by briefly touching the so-called mini driving in-
structions in the top left corner. 1. Press the g button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET MAP
> Map view. The following map display criteria are then availa-
ble to you:
Junction zoom When this function is activated, the upcoming driving manoeuvre (e.g. leaving the motorway) is displayed greatly enlarged during route guid-
ance. If you press the Back button h while a driving manoeuvre is shown in enlarged form, the enlarged view is cancelled. However, the function remains active. Pressing the Back button h again reac-
tivates the enlarged display. When this function is activated, a perspective map view is displayed. Terrain model (Birds-eye view) When this function is activated, a 3D terrain model is displayed. 3D building When this function is activated, a 3D town model is displayed when the 3D map is activat-
ed. 3D POIs When this function is activated, the 3D points of interest are only displayed in the 3D map. Satellite image When this function is activated, a satellite im-
age is displayed for a scale of over 2 km (ap-
prox. 1.2 miles). Speed limit When this function is activated, speed limits are displayed in the driving instructions (see CAR). Map display 169 WARNING!
Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver. This does not release you from your full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle. Road signs en-route should always be heeded. The speed limit displayed by the PCM may not always be correct. As the driver, you must assess the particular speed limit. You have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car. Continue to heed road signs en-route. Show traffic When this function is activated, the traffic mes-
sages are displayed in the map view. Guidance When this function is activated, driving instruc-
tions are displayed in the form of arrow sym-
bols. Footer (station/track) When this function is activated, the footer is also shown in the map view. Map menu When this function is activated, a symbol is dis-
played in the map view that gives you access to all of the functions of the map menu. North arrow When this function is activated, a north arrow is displayed. North orientation When this function is activated, the map will be oriented to the north. If the Birds-eye view option is active, the North orientation option has no function. Day/night switchover The following options are available for you to select:
Automatic The map view automatically switches from day design to night design as a function of the vehicle lighting. Day The map view always remains set to the day design colours. This means the display col-
ours are optimised for legibility. Night The map view always remains set to the night design colours. The display colours are dimmed to prevent glare. 170 Map display Display arrival time You can choose whether the estimated Arrival time or the Remaining time is to be dis-
played in the map view. 4. Select the various list items to show (
) or
) them in the map view. hide (
The map view is adapted in accordance with your settings. Compiling the points of interest to be displayed 1. Press the g button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET MAP
> Show POIs. The list containing the various point of inter-
est categories is displayed. 4. Select the point of interest category you want. The list containing the associated subcatego-
ries is displayed. 5. Select the various subcategories to show (
)
) them in the map view. or hide (
The map view is adapted in accordance with your settings. Voice control How voice control works............................. 172 Incorrect operation and cancelling a dialogue ............................................... 172 Functions of the button on the stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher ...................................... 172 Speech intelligibility.................................. 172 Symbols in sample dialogues ...................... 173 Commands ................................................ 173 Local commands .................................... 173 Global commands ................................... 173 Voice entries .......................................... 174 Activating voice control ............................ 175 Deactivating voice control ........................ 175 Setting the language ............................... 175 Configuring the voice control system......... 176 Performing voice adaptation ..................... 177 Using the help function ............................... 177 Operating lists using voice control ............ 178 Operating examples ................................... 179 Operating example for radio mode............ 179 Operating example for TV tuner ................ 181 Operating example for CD/DVD mode ....... 182 Operating example for iPod mode ............. 183 Operating example for telephone mode ..... 185 Operating example for navigation mode..... 189 Operating example for map ...................... 192 Voice control 171 Voice controlPlease refer to the information on operation and road safety on page 6. The PCM is fully voice controllable (with the excep-
tion of the functions in the w and b menus as well as the various SET menus). The voice control system is designed so that you can generally say each menu item shown on the display. Exceptions are indicated by an appropri-
ate message on the display of the PCM. Voice control is activated by pressing the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher (please see also section Ac-
tivating voice control on page 175). This allows you to operate the PCM without taking your hands from the steering wheel. How voice control works The voice control system recognises commands or numerical sequences regardless of the speak-
er. It provides acoustic feedback and guides you through the functions. Incorrect operation and cancelling a dialogue If you say an incorrect or unavailable command, the voice control system responds with Could you repeat that? and you can repeat the command. After the 2nd failed attempt, the system offers as-
sistance; after the 3rd failed attempt, the PCM aborts the operation and terminates the dialogue with End. You have the following options for terminating voice control during a dialogue:
Say cancel when the voice control system is expecting a command. Say End when the voice control system is ex-
pecting a command. Press any button on the PCM. The PCM then executes the function corre-
sponding to the pressed button. The only exception to this is the volume con-
trol. You can only use this button to adapt the volume of the announcements, not to termi-
nate a dialogue. Functions of the button on the stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher By pressing the button on the stalk for direction in-
dicators, high beam and headlight flasher you can:
terminate a voice control announcement while it is in progress, skip to the next part of the announcement in the case of announcements with multiple parts, cancel a dialogue manually. The button has no function during a telephone call. Speech intelligibility To make it easier for your voice control system to understand your commands, please note the fol-
lowing points:
The hands-free microphone is directed to-
wards the drivers seat. The voice control sys-
tem should therefore be operated by the driv-
er. Do not speak while your voice control system is making an announcement. Speak without interruptions and at a normal volume. Avoid long pauses and excessive em-
phasis. 172 Voice control Reduce background noise by closing the win-
dows, doors and sunroof. While giving voice commands, avoid other noise in the vehicle (e.g. passengers speaking among themselves). WARNING!
Accident hazard Since stressful situations can cause your voice to change, it may happen that a telephone connection you want is not es-
tablished quickly enough. Do not use the voice control system to op-
erate the telephone in cases of emergency. For safety reasons, an emergency call can only be initiated directly on the device. Symbols in sample dialogues A number of the voice commands initiate dia-
logues between you and the voice control system. A few of these dialogues are presented in the op-
erating manual as examples. The following symbols are used in the sample dia-
logues:
symbol This symbol identifies a voice command spoken by you.
symbol This symbol identifies an announcement made by the PCM.
symbol This symbol identifies a message shown on the PCM display. Beepsymbol This symbol identifies the audible signal that sounds as soon as the PCM is ready to accept a command. Commands The commands supported by your voice control system are divided into two categories:
Local commands Local commands can only be spoken within the re-
spective main function. They are not listed here since they include all menu items shown on the display. The only exceptions are the w and b menus as well as the various SET men-
us. These are not voice controllable. Voice control for lists is different and is described in the section Operating lists using voice control on page 178. Global commands Global commands can be spoken in any function. They include:
the main functions of your PCM, selected shortcuts (branching directly to a function without opening its main function be-
forehand) as well as the various help topics. Voice control 173 Global commands for the voice-controlled main functions:
Tuner, radio Disc, CD phone, Telephone info navi, Navigation map Global commands for the non-voice-controlled main functions:
sound car Global commands related to the telephone:
call, phone call name, make call to name Dial number Global commands related to navigation:
go to destination, go to destination ...*
begin route guidance cancel route guidance enter address input country input town input street input junction go home go to office search ATM search hotel search restaurant search petrol station Global commands for the help function:
help help voice control help devices help source help tuner help disc help phone, help telephone help info help navi, help navigation help map help option 174 Voice control Other global commands:
source traffic messages set TP deactivate set TP traffic messages, show traffic messages, Read out traffic messages on route cancel, end back Voice entries You can assign so-called voice entries for entries in the phonebook as well as for destinations in your personal destination memory. These voice entries are intended to make it easier for you to call up people or places with names that are difficult to understand (e.g. foreign names). You can assign 20 voice entries each for the phonebook and destination memory. Please note that recognition of the voice en-
tries depends on the language currently se-
lected for the voice control system. Therefore, always use the language that you wish to use for voice control when creating the voice entries. If you change the language, the system may no longer reliably recognise the voice entries that you have trained it for in another lan-
guage. As soon as the voice control system is activated, you will see one of the following symbols at the top right of the display:
= The voice control system is awaiting a spoken command.
= The voice control system is currently making an announcement. Deactivating voice control You can deactivate the voice control system as fol-
lows:
Press the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher.
- or -
Say cancel or end when the voice control system is expecting a command. After the system is deactivated, you will hear a confirmation announcement of End, after which the voice control system switches off. Basic voice control functions Activating voice control You cannot activate the voice control system while you are on a telephone call. 1. Switch on the ignition and the PCM. 2. Press the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher. An audible signal sounds after a short time, the voice control system is activated and awaits a spoken command. If you do not say a com-
mand, the voice control system prompts you to speak with the request, Could you repeat that?. Setting the volume You can change the volume of the voice control system announcements to compensate for chang-
es in the ambient noise during the journey, for ex-
ample. 1. Activate the voice control system and say a command such as help. 2. Turn the volume control on your device during an announcement to raise or lower the volume of the announcement. The volume of the voice control system an-
nouncements is independent of that of the tel-
ephone and audio system. Setting the language The voice control system recognises various lan-
guages. When you change the language, it affects voice input by the user, voice output by the PCM and the language shown on the display. Voice control 175 Repeat The voice control system repeats all recog-
nised commands. You can switch off this repetition. Switching it off makes using the voice control system faster but this comes at the expense of not knowing whether the voice control system has correctly recog-
nised the command given. Voice entries and digits are always repeated, even if the function is switched off. Quick dialog If you activate this function, the PCM outputs certain announcements in an abridged form. This does not change the information con-
tent of the announcements. This option is useful for experienced users. Show hints This function is switched on at the factory. If it is switched on and voice control is activat-
ed, the PCM shows you commands that are available in addition to the menu items al-
ready shown. 4. Select to activate (
spective function.
) or deactivate (
) the re-
Configuring the voice control system You can configure how you interact with the voice control system in just a few steps. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Voice control. The following options are then available for you to select:
Selecting the language yourself 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM language. 4. Select the language you want. Adapting the language to the instrument cluster 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> PCM language. 4. Select Automatic. The language of the instrument cluster is set. If the language of the instrument cluster is not available as a language in the PCM, the lan-
guage English GB is set. 176 Voice control Performing voice adaptation The voice adaptation function allows you to individ-
ually adapt the voice control system to your voice, thereby improving the voice recognition. This does not impair the recognition of other users. Adaptation can only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Please note the first five points in the section Speech intelligibility on page 172 in connection with this. Starting/cancelling voice adaptation 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Voice control
> Voice adaptation. 4. Select Start adaptation. Adaptation starts and commences interaction with the user. 5. Follow the instructions of the PCM and repeat each command and numerical sequence after the tone. Adaptation ends automatically after the last command and the data is automatically stored. 6. Select Cancel to abort the adaptation. In this case no data is stored. Deleting voice adaptation 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header. 3. Select SET PCM system
> Voice control
> Voice adaptation. 4. Select Delete adaptation. 5. Select Yes or No. The adaptation is deleted or not deleted de-
pending on your selection. Using the help function Help functions in the PCM The voice control system features an integrated help function with commands that are always avail-
able. You will find an overview of the commands in the section Global commands, subsection Glo-
bal commands for the help function: on page 174. Below you will find a brief description of the most important help commands. help command:
When you say this command, the PCM reads out the commands available for the menu items currently shown. It also tells you the commands to use to obtain further help. help voice control command:
This command interactively guides you to the help you need using the available help topics and help areas. help devices command:
After this command, the PCM prompts you for the main function on which you need help, for example tuner or disc. You are then interac-
tively guided to the help you want using the available help topics and help areas. Voice control 177 help command, followed by a main function, e.g. Disc:
This command allows you to skip the step of specifying the main function for which you need help. It brings you directly to the help for a specific main function. Like the voice control system, you can also deac-
tivate the help. To find out how to do this, please refer to the section Deactivating voice control on page 175. Help texts in the instrument cluster Operating lists using voice control During a dialogue between you and the voice con-
trol system, information, voice-controlled com-
mands and lists are displayed in the instrument cluster of your vehicle. To find out more, please refer also to the corre-
sponding chapter in the owners manual. Scrolling in a list You can scroll through any list using the com-
mands scroll down and scroll up. Voice-controlled lists symbol to the right of a list entry, If you see the it means that the list is voice controllable. You have the following options for selecting a row in voice-controlled lists:
Saying the contents as they are displayed in the row.
- or -
Say the command line number, directly fol-
lowed by the number you see on the right end of the row. Non-voice-controlled lists With non-voice-controlled lists, you can only select a row using the row number. Say the command line number, directly fol-
lowed by the number you see on the right end of the row. Reading out list contents In voice-controlled lists you can have the list con-
tents read out. The PCM starts with the highlighted list row and reads out the list down to the last row. Say the command read out. 178 Voice control Operating example for radio mode Tuning to a currently receivable FM station Calling up radio mode and switching waveband Activate voice control.
Beep
Tuner.
Tuner. The PCM switches to radio mode if another mode was active prior to the command being entered. If radio mode was already active, the waveband is switched. Selecting the preset memory You can select a preset memory directly. Do this by saying the command preset memory FM 1, for example. If you know the currently receivable FM stations and if radio mode is your active audio source, you can tune to the station you want by saying its name. Activate voice control.
Beep
Station BBC Radio 3.
Station KCRW. The PCM tunes to the corresponding station. Tuning to stored FM stations You can either say the name of a stored station from the FM main menu or the number of the cor-
responding memory location. Activate voice control.
Beep
Station BBC Radio 3.
Station KCRW. Operating examples The voice control system is designed so that you can say each menu item shown on the display. If you activate the Show hints function, exceptions are indicated by an appropriate message on the display of the PCM. The PCM also shows you the most relevant com-
mands possible at that time as soon as you are prompted to enter a command. To find out more, please refer to the section Configuring the voice control system on page 176. Due to the large number of control options, we have chosen to provide a number of operating ex-
amples on the following pages instead of a full list-
ing of all voice-controlled functions. Voice control 179
- or -
Activate voice control.
Beep
Station number 1.
Station number 1. The PCM tunes to the corresponding station. Tuning to stored AM stations You can say the memory location of a stored sta-
tion from the AM main menu. Activate voice control.
Beep
Station number 1.
Station number 1. The PCM tunes to the corresponding station. Entering a frequency You can also tune to FM and AM stations by enter-
ing the frequency. The frequency input menu only accepts frequencies within the given waveband:
FM waveband: 87.5 - 108.0 MHz, with 0.5 MHz increments. AM waveband: 531 kHz - 1620 kHz, with 1 kHz increments. Example for entering the frequency 98.4 MHz in the FM waveband:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Manual tune.
Manual tune.
The display switches to the frequency input menu.
Please say the desired frequency. Beep
Ninety-eight point four.
Frequency Ninety-eight point four megahertz. The PCM tunes to the corresponding frequen-
cy; the frequency input menu stays open. With the command frequency directly fol-
lowed by the MHz frequency you want, you can enter a frequency without the display changing to the frequency input menu. Station search You can use the commands next station and previous station to start the station search in the FM or AM waveband. The search scans upwards or downwards and automatically stops at the next receivable station. Automatic station search (autostore) The automatic station search fills the memory of the preset memory currently selected with the six stations with the strongest reception signal at the present time. Any stations that have already been stored
(e.g. manually stored) are overwritten. This function is not available for preset memories BEST FM and MIXED. Example for entering an autostore in the preset memory FM1:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Autostore FM1.
Autostore FM1. The PCM starts the function. Starting/stopping the scan function If you activate this function, each station found within the frequency range will be played for ap-
prox. 5 seconds. Activate voice control.
Beep
Start scan. 180 Voice control
Start scan. The PCM plays the stations one after the other. Activate voice control.
Beep
Stop scan.
Stop scan. The PCM tunes to the station currently playing. Switching the traffic programme on/off Switch the traffic programme on and off using set TP and deactivate set TP. Tuning to stations from the station list The station list is available in the FM waveband and contains all currently receivable stations. Activate voice control.
Beep
Station list.
Station list.
The station list is displayed. Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the station you want. The following two options are available to you for tuning to a station:
Station BBC Radio 3.
Station BBC Radio 3. The PCM tunes to the station BBC Radio 3.
- or -
Line number 3.
Line 3. The PCM tunes to the corresponding station. You can also tune to a station from the station list directly without calling up the list first. Say the Station command, directly followed by the name of the station as it appears in the list. The station list is a voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section Operating lists using voice control on page 178. Operating example for TV tuner Calling up TV mode Activate voice control.
Beep
Tuner TV.
Tuner TV. The PCM switches to TV mode. Selecting the preset memory You can select a preset memory directly. Do this by saying the command preset memory TV 1, for example. Station search You can use the commands next station or pre-
vious station to start the station search. The search scans upwards or downwards and auto-
matically stops at the next receivable station. Voice control 181 Tuning to stations from the station list The station list contains all the stations that can currently be received. Activate voice control.
Beep
Read out station list.
Read out station list. The stations are read out one after the other. The following two options are available to you for tuning to a station:
Station BBC1.
Station BBC1. The PCM tunes to BBC1.
- or -
Line number 3.
Line 3. The PCM tunes to the corresponding station. Calling up video text pages Activate voice control.
Beep
Video text.
Video text. Video text appears. 182 Voice control
Track list.
Track list.
The track list is displayed. Selecting a track from the track list:
Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the track you want.
Line number 3.
Line 3. The PCM plays the corresponding track. If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/
DVD, the track list shows the names of the root directories as well as the subdirectories. You can also choose folders and playlists us-
ing the line number command, directly fol-
lowed by the corresponding number. The track list is a non-voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section Operating lists using voice con-
trol on page 178. The following two options are available to you for opening a video text page:
next page.
next page. The PCM opens the page.
- or -
Page 333.
Page 333. The PCM opens the corresponding page. Operating example for CD/DVD mode Calling up CD/DVD mode Activate voice control.
Beep
Disc.
Disc. The PCM switches to disc mode. Selecting a track from the track list The track list contains all the tracks on the CD/
DVD currently being played. Activate voice control.
Beep Choosing a track by skipping You can skip to the previous or next track using the previous track and next track commands respectively. Choosing a CD/DVD by entering the disc number You can select a specific disc directly using the Disc number command, directly followed by the corresponding number. Choosing a track by entering the track number Repeating a track Scanning tracks When this function is activated, the PCM plays a brief snippet of each track on the disc currently playing in sequence. Start and stop the scan function using the Start scan and Stop scan commands. When this function is activated, the current track or chapter (video DVD mode) is repeated. Activate and deactivate the repeat function using the activate repeat and deactivate repeat com-
mands. Switching the shuffle function on/off When this function is activated, the PCM plays the tracks on the disc currently playing in random or-
der. Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using the activate shuffle and deactivate shuffle com-
mands. Operating example for iPod mode Calling up iPod mode Activate voice control.
Beep
Disc iPod.
Disc iPod. The PCM switches to iPod mode. You can select a track directly in CD/DVD mode using the track number or track command, di-
rectly followed by the corresponding number. Choosing a disc using the disc list The disc list contains all available CDs/DVDs. Activate voice control.
Beep
Disc selection.
Disc selection.
The disc list is displayed.
Please say the number of the required disc.
Disc number 3.
Disc number 3.
The PCM plays the corresponding CD/DVD. The disc list is a non-voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section Operating lists using voice con-
trol on page 178. Voice control 183
Artists.
Artists.
A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored on the iPod is displayed. Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the track you want.
Line number 3.
Line 3.
activate repeat. The PCM plays the corresponding track. Selecting a track from the track list Repeating a track Activate voice control.
Beep
Track list.
Track list.
The track list is displayed. The iPod determines the sorting of the lists. Selecting a track from the track list:
Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the track you want.
Line number 3.
Line 3. The PCM plays the corresponding track. Choosing a track by skipping You can skip to the previous or next track using the previous track and next track commands respectively. Choosing a track by entering the track number You can select a track directly in iPod mode using the track number or track command, directly followed by the corresponding number. Activating this function repeats the current track. Activate and deactivate the repeat function using the activate repeat and deactivate repeat com-
mands. Switching the shuffle function on/off When this function is activated, the PCM plays the tracks in the track list in random order. Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using the activate shuffle and deactivate shuffle com-
mands. Searching for music You can start a music search in iPod mode based on the following criteria:
Artists, albums, track and music genres. Below is an example of how to perform a search for the tracks of a specific artist. Activate voice control.
Beep
Find music.
Find music. 184 Voice control Operating example for telephone mode Calling up telephone mode WARNING!
Injury hazard. In emergency situations, stress may cause your voice to change to an extent where it might take longer than normal to establish a telephone connection. Do not use the voice control system in cas-
es of emergency. Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-
volving explosives. Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-
ple. They can interfere with technical equip-
ment. Please heed appropriate warnings. Observe statutory regulations and local re-
strictions when using the telephone. Activate voice control.
Beep
Telephone.
Telephone. The PCM switches to telephone mode. Entering the PIN The digits zero to nine are permitted when en-
tering the PIN. The following two options are avail-
able to you when saying the digits:
Say all digits in a single block without a pause. Group and say the individual digits in blocks, for example the first three digits and then the next three digits. Leave a pause after each block and wait until the PCM has repeated the digits from the last block entered before say-
ing the next block. If you say the digits in blocks, you can use the correction command to delete the last block. The PCM then repeats the last correct block and you can continue with your input. You can delete the complete entry using the de-
lete command. If you are saying all the digits without a pause, both these commands delete the complete entry. Activate voice control in the PIN input menu
(see above).
The PIN, please.. Beep
One two three four. Voice control 185 If you say the telephone number in blocks, you can use the correction command to delete the last block. The PCM then repeats the last correct block and you can continue with your input. The delete command deletes the complete en-
try. If you are saying all the digits without a pause, both these commands delete the complete entry. If you try to enter more than 32 digits, you will hear an announcement that the number is too long and that the last input has been deleted. Example for an overseas call to Germany:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Dial number.
Dial number. Beep
plus four nine.
Plus four nine. Beep
Seven two four eight.
Seven two four eight. Beep
Seven one zero.
Seven one zero. Beep
Call number.
Dialling the number. The PCM dials the number. The Dial number command is a global com-
mand and therefore also works in other modes (e. g. navigation mode). You will find other global commands in the section Global commands on page 173. Calling up the phonebook Activate voice control.
Beep
Phonebook.
Phonebook.
The phonebook is displayed as a list.
One two three four. Beep
Ok.
Checking the PIN. The PCM switches to telephone mode if the en-
tered PIN is correct. Entering a telephone number The digits zero to nine as well as the following words are permitted when entering the digits:
Star for the * character hash for the # character plus for the + character When calling international telephone numbers, use the word plus at the beginning of the number, fol-
lowed by the country code. Then enter the local area code without the first digit, and then the tele-
phone number. The following two options are available to you when saying the telephone number:
Say all digits in a single block without a pause. Say the telephone number in blocks, leaving a pause after each block and waiting until the PCM has repeated the digits from the last block entered before saying the next block. 186 Voice control Calling a phonebook entry Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the en-
try you want. The following two options are available to you for making a call to an entry:
1. Say the Call command, directly followed by the name of the entry. This option is global and also works outside the phonebook. 2. Say the command line number, directly followed by the corresponding number shown on the right end of the row. This option is not global and only works within the phonebook. Furthermore, unlike option 1, it does not result in direct dialling of the telephone number. If you are saying the name of a phonebook en-
try, please note the following:
Say the name as normal, do not spell it out. If the name of a phonebook entry is in a language other than that currently set in the PCM, the voice control system may not recognise it correctly. With phonebook entries with multiple num-
bers, the entry can also be directly selected by additionally speaking the category
(e.g. Mr. Smith Office). If the specified cate-
gory does not exist for this entry, the available categories are announced. Example for option 1:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Call Information.
Dialing the number of Information. The PCM dials the number. Example for option 2:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Line number 3.
Line 3.
The details for the corresponding phonebook entry are displayed. Activate voice control.
Beep
Call number.
Call number.. Dialling the number.. The PCM dials the number. Assigning a voice entry for an entry in the phonebook The command Change pronunciation can be used to store speech entries for entries in the tel-
ephone book of your telephone. You can use these voice entries to make a call without having to enter the other persons number. Voice control 187 To store a voice entry, you must first select an en-
try in the phonebook containing both a name and a telephone number. Activate voice control.
Beep
Change pronunciation.
Change pronunciation. Please say a name. Beep
Mr. Smith.
Please say the name a second time. Beep
Mr. Smith.
The pronunciation Mr. Smith has been stored. The voice entry has been stored for the entry in the phonebook. The command delete pronunciation is used to delete an existing speech entry. List of previous calls The Previous calls menu provides you access to a list of the telephone numbers you have recently dialled. You can select a list entry using voice con-
trol and call it again. Activate voice control.
Beep
Previous calls.
Previous calls.
The list of previous calls is displayed. To find out how to select a list entry and make a call, please refer to the section Calling a phone-
book entry on page 187. List of received calls The Received calls menu provides you access to a list of the calls you have recently received. You can select a list entry using voice control and call it back. Activate voice control.
Beep
Received calls.
Received calls.
The list of received calls is displayed. To find out how to select a list entry and make a call, please refer to the section Calling a phone-
book entry on page 187. Reading out text messages
(with PCM telephone only) You can use the read out messages command to skip to the list of text messages and have the mes-
sage headers read out. To have the contents of a text message that is highlighted in the list read out, say the read out details command. To have the contents of an open text message read out, say the read out command. 188 Voice control Operating example for navigation mode Calling up navigation mode Activate voice control.
Beep
Navigation.
Navigation. The PCM switches to navigation mode. Entering an address and starting route guidance If the language set in the PCM and the language spoken at the destination are the same, you can say the country, town, and street as whole words. If the two languages are not the same, you must spell the town and the street. This applies to des-
tinations in countries with more than one official language and to destinations in other countries. If route guidance had previously been started, the country is already preset. In this case, the address entry starts with the prompt Please say the town. If you would like to set another country, you must start the dialogue with the input coun-
try command. Activate voice control.
Beep
enter address.
enter address. Please say the town. Beep
Stuttgart.
Please say the street. Beep
Porschestrae. If the named town and street were uniquely identified by the voice control system when entered for the first time, the next step is skipped and you can proceed directly to entry of the house number.
A list of towns and/or a list of streets is dis-
played if necessary.
Please make your selection. Beep Scroll through the list in this case using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the town you want.
Line number 3. If you are unable to find the destination you want in the town or street list, you can repeat your entry by selecting the correction com-
mand.
Stuttgart, Porschestrae. Would you like to input a street number?
Beep
Yes.
Please say the street number. Beep
One hundred and thirty two.
One hundred and thirty two. Would you like to start route guidance?
Beep
Yes. The PCM calculates the route. If you want to start route guidance in the cen-
tre of a town, begin the dialogue with the in-
put town command. Then select the town and respond to the request for the street by saying the Start route guidance command. Voice control 189 You can store traces in the personal desti-
nation memory. When doing so, the PCM suggests a name. You cannot select rows with these default names by saying their contents. If you name the trace yourself, however, you can select the row by saying its con-
tents. If you know the name of the destination, you can start route guidance directly using the go to destination ...* command. Activate voice control.
Beep
Previous destinations.
Previous destinations.
- or -
Stored destinations.
Stored destinations.
The list of previous destinations or the person-
al destination memory is displayed. Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up until you find the destination you want. The following two options are available to you for starting route guidance to a destination:
1. Say the row contents shown on the display. 2. Say the line number command, directly followed by the corresponding number of the row, which shown at its right end. Example for option 1:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Porschestrae.
The details for the list entry are displayed. Activate voice control.
Beep
Start route guidance.
Start route guidance. The PCM calculates the route to the destina-
tion. Entering a destination from the list of previous destinations or from the personal destination memory The Previous destinations menu provides you ac-
cess to a list of the last destinations to which you started route guidance. In the Stored destinations menu you will find the destinations you have stored in your personal des-
tination memory. Both lists are voice-controlled lists, to find out more about this please refer also to the sec-
tion Operating lists using voice control on page 178. If you want to transfer a row to the voice con-
trol system by saying the contents, please note also the following:
You can say all other row contents as they are displayed. If the voice control system has difficulty understanding the contents, we recommend saying the number of the re-
spective row. Both lists can contain rows with geographi-
cal coordinates. Example: 8 55 32 E 48 51 5 N. You cannot select these rows by saying their contents; you must say the row number. 190 Voice control
The points of interest menu is displayed.
Please select the category. Beep
The category list is displayed. Scroll through the list using the commands scroll down or scroll up commands until you find the category you want. The categories, like the subcategories also, can all be spoken. You can, however, also say the number of the line containing the category you want. The row number is at the right of the row.
Line number 5.
Line 5.
The subcategory list is displayed.
Please make your selection. Beep
Line number 3.
Line 3. Where would you like to search?. Beep
You see the menu for the search areas. The en-
tered subcategory or the entered marker is shown on the left beside the Category menu item. You can now enter the search area in which the PCM is to search for points of interest.
Vehicle surroundings.
Vehicle surroundings accepted. Please select the destination.
A list containing the possible points of interest is displayed.
Line number 3.
Line 3. Would you like to start route guidance?.
Yes. The PCM calculates the route to the point of inter-
est. Searching for a point of interest with a known category and search area You can shorten the input for a search for a point of interest by grouping the subcategory and search area in a single command, for example. Example for option 2:
Activate voice control.
Beep
Line number 3.
Line 3. Activate voice control.
Start route guidance.
Start route guidance. The PCM calculates the route to the destina-
tion. Searching for points of interest The POI menu provides you with access to points of interest such as petrol stations, parking areas, restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for exam-
ple. The points of interest are divided into different cat-
egories to make them easier for you to find. With the voice control system, you can select a point of interest by entering the category and sub-
category as well as the search area. Below you will see an example for entering a point of interest in the vicinity of the vehicle. Activate voice control.
Beep
POI.
POI. Voice control 191 You can also use the read out details com-
mand to read out the details of a traffic mes-
sage as soon as it is highlighted in the list. Operating example for map Calling up the map view Activate voice control.
Beep
Map.
Map. The PCM switches to the map view. Setting the map scale You can say all of the available map scales or dis-
play your total route on the map using the total route command.
Please select the destination. Beep
Line number 3.
Line 3. Would you like to start route guidance?.
Yes. Route guidance to the selected point of interest is started. Announcing traffic messages on the route This function is only available during active route guidance. Activate voice control.
Beep
Read out traffic messages on route.
Read out traffic messages on route.
The list of traffic messages on the route is dis-
played.
A 8 direction... The list of traffic messages on the route is read out, beginning with the first entry. The traffic message currently being read is highlighted. Activate voice control.
Beep
Point of interest golf course near destination.
The result list for the search is displayed.
Please select the destination. Beep
Line number 3.
Line 3. Would you like to start route guidance?.
Yes. The PCM calculates the route to the point of inter-
est. Searching for a point of interest along a route If route guidance is active, you can search the planned route for a point of interest using the along route command. If route guidance is not active, you can instead search for a specific point of interest using the in surroundings command. Activate voice control.
Beep
Search petrol station along route.
The result list for the search is displayed. 192 Voice control Setting 3D display Setting the map orientation If this function is activated, a three-dimensional map view is shown. You can activate and deactivate the function using the activate birds eye view and deactivate birds eye view commands. Displaying traffic messages You can change the orientation of the map using the following commands:
activate north orientation, deactivate north orientation, show destination and show location. When this function is activated, traffic information is also shown in the map view. Activate and deactivate the function using the ac-
tivate show traffic and deactivate show traffic commands. Repeating a navigation announcement If you say the guidance announcement com-
mand during active route guidance, the last navi-
gation announcement is repeated. Setting autozoom If you have activated this function, the entire cur-
rent route section is displayed. Activate and deactivate the function using the ac-
tivate autozoom and deactivate autozoom com-
mands. Voice control 193 A AAC-LC ...................................................................35 Accepting a call ................................................ 58, 74 Activating alternative routes for route guidance ............143 Activating the entry aid.............................................137 Activating the interface ...................................... 47, 48 Activating the rain sensor .........................................136 Activating the rear wiper...........................................137 Adapting the volume for an external audio source ...........47 Adding destinations to the personal destination memory 147 Alternative frequencies...............................................25 Answer button ..........................................................12 Area search ...........................................................151 Assigning a key ......................................................123 Audio formats...........................................................35 Audio source Displaying detailed information .........................111 Selecting ..........................................................8 Automatic call answering............................................95 Automatic station search in radio mode ........................24 Automatic station search in TV mode............................28 Autostore (radio).......................................................24 Autostore (TV) ..........................................................28 AUX........................................................................47 Activating the interface .....................................47 Adapting the volume .........................................47 Switching to an external audio source..................47 AUX BT ...................................................................48 Activating the interface .....................................48 Fast forward/reverse........................................49 Repeating a track.............................................49 Shuffle function................................................49 Skipping tracks................................................49 Starting/stopping scanning................................49 Switching to an external Bluetooth audio source .48 Avoiding a stretch of road ........................................155 B Back button .............................................................11 Best FM ..................................................................23 Best FM preset memory.............................................23 Bluetooth..............................................................54 Adding a new device ..........50, 68, 97, 125, 133, 150 Authorised devices ...............50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150 Calling up Bluetooth settings .............49, 124, 133, 149 Connecting an authorised device with the PCM........50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150 Deleting an authorised device from the list ................50, 67, 96, 125, 134, 150 Deleting the list of authorised devices ...............50, 67, 96, 126, 134, 150 Disconnecting an authorised and connected device from the PCM ........................................67 Displaying authorised devices ...............50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150 Displaying details for the authorised device..51, 68, 97, 126, 134, 150 Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth device.................50, 57, 69, 125, 133, 150 Renaming an authorised device.................50, 67, 96, 125, 133, 150 Setting the profile of the authorised device ...........96 Setting visibility.....50, 69, 98, 125, 133, 150 Settings (external Bluetooth audio source) .........49 Settings (logbook) ..........................................124 Settings (navigation) .......................................149 Settings (Sport display) ...................................133 Settings (telephone).................................. 67, 95 Switching Bluetooth on/off ................................49, 125, 133, 149 Switching on/off ..............................................56 Brightness of the display ............................................19 Buttons .....................................................................9 Index Calling C Call forwarding .........................................................93 Call settings.............................................................93 Call volume..............................................................66 Call waiting ................................ 64, 65, 81, 82, 94 Accepting a call ....................................... 64, 82 Ending a connected call ............................ 64, 82 Rejecting a call ........................................ 64, 81 Dialling a number ..................................... 60, 75 Number from the list of previous calls.......... 61, 78 Number from the list of received calls.......... 62, 79 Phonebook entry...................................... 61, 76 Calling a destination from the personal destination memory.................................................148 Calling the destination..............................................146 Cancelling a block...................................................154 Cancelling a detour .................................................154 CD/DVD Calling up the CD/DVD changer menu..................36 Calling up the main menu...................................37 Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ...........36 Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive) ...............36 Ejecting all CD/DVDs (with CD/DVD changer) ........37 Fast forward/reverse........................................39 Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ...........36 Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive)................36 Loading all CDs/DVDs
(with empty CD/DVD changer) ............................36 Naming a CD...................................................38 Repeating a track.............................................39 Searching for a track (MP3 CD) ..........................39 Searching for music (MP3 CD)............................39 Selecting a CD/DVD .........................................37 Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode................38 Selecting a track..............................................37 Selecting a track (MP3 CD) ................................37 Setting DVD audio groups..................................38 Setting the DVD audio format .............................38 Setting the mode .............................................37 Skipping to the next track..................................39 Index 194 Starting/stopping scanning................................39 Switching the shuffle function on/off....................39 Changing the PIN ......................................................92 Colour (TV)...............................................................32 Conducting calls with the hands-free unit ............... 58, 73 Conference...................................................... 65, 82 Configuring the display...............................................18 Contrast..................................................................32 Controls ....................................................................9 Copyright ................................................................34 Cordless handset....................................................101 Accepting a call .............................................102 Call waiting (swapping) and conference ..............103 Charging ......................................................101 Dialling a number ...........................................102 Ending a call .................................................102 Establishing an additional call ...........................102 Muting the microphone ...................................102 Phonebook ...................................................104 Rejecting a call ..............................................102 Settings .......................................................107 Switching on/off ............................................101 Text messages (SMS) .....................................105 Creating a template for SMS.......................................90 D Deleting ..................................................................11 Authorised Bluetooth device ...50, 67, 96, 125, 134, 150 Contact person (logbook) ................................123 Contents of the SIM card...................................77 Destination (list of previous destinations) ............145 Destinations from the personal destination memory........................................148 Driver (logbook) .............................................123 Key assignment in the logbook .........................123 Lap in the Sport display recording.....................130 List of authorised Bluetooth devices .50, 67, 96, 126, 134, 150 Phonebook entry..............................................77 Recording in the Sport display..........................130 Reference lap for the Sport display ...................131 Stopovers.....................................................157 Telephone number .....................61, 62, 78, 79 Text message (SMS).........................................87 Trip destination (logbook) ................................123 Trip purpose (logbook) ....................................123 Trips in the logbook........................................123 vCards ...........................................................89 Deleting a destination (list of previous destinations) .......145 Deleting a destination (personal destination memory).....148 Deleting a lap (Sport display).....................................130 Deleting characters ...................................................11 Deleting entered characters........................................11 Destination input using geographical coordinates..........158 Destination input using the map .................................158 Dialling a number (telephone) .............................. 60, 75 Direct dialling ................................................... 60, 75 Display....................................................................12 Cleaning ...........................................................7 Colour touchscreen ..........................................12 Faults...............................................................7 Operating .......................................................12 Switching back on ............................................18 Switching off ...................................................18 Display faults..............................................................7 Displaying destination/location ..................................167 Displaying detailed information about the audio source ..111 Displaying driving instructions in the map view..............170 Displaying route sections..........................................111 Displaying sections of the route.................................168 Displaying speed limits in the map display ...................169 Displaying the footer in the map view..........................170 Displaying the north arrow in the map view ..................170 Displaying the satellite image in the map view ..............169 Displaying the system version .....................................19 Displaying the total route in the map...........................167 Displaying traffic messages (TMC)..............................109 Displaying traffic messages in the map view ................170 Dolby Digital..........................................................35 DTMF tones ..................................................... 63, 80 DTS........................................................................35 E Editing Address of a destination
(list of previous destinations) ............................145 Address of a destination
(personal destination memory)..........................147 Data from the current trip (logbook)...................120 Destination name of a personal destination .........148 Phonebook entry..............................................77 Editing an address (list of previous destinations) ...........145 Editing an address (personal destination memory).........147 Ejecting a CD ...........................................................11 Ejecting a DVD..........................................................11 Ejecting CDs/DVDs....................................................36 Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) ..............................30 Emergency call.........................................................83 End call button..........................................................11 Ending a call..................................................... 59, 74 Ending a lap (Sport display).......................................129 Entering a name........................................................14 Entering a space.......................................................14 Entering an address.................................................141 Entering an address (list of previous destinations) .........145 Entering an address (personal destination memory).......147 Entering the country ................................................142 Entering the junction ................................................143 Entering the postal code...........................................142 Entering the street ..................................................142 Entering the street number .......................................142 Entering the town ....................................................142 Establishing an additional call .............................. 63, 81 Extended memory ...................................................135 External audio source (AUX) ........................................47 Activating the interface......................................47 Switching to an external audio source ..................47 External Bluetooth audio source Activating the interface......................................48 Switching to an external Bluetooth audio source..48 External Bluetooth audio source (AUX BT) ...................48 F Fast forward/reverse .......................... 39, 42, 46, 49 Finding the cordless handset.......................................98 Format ....................................................................32 Forward/reverse AUX BT...........................................................49 CD/DVD .........................................................39 iPod...............................................................42 USB...............................................................46 Frequency entry........................................................23 Index 195 G Geographical coordinates ........................................ 158 GPS antenna.......................................................... 140 H Help function for the voice control system .................. 177 Holding a call (telephone) ....................................60, 76 I IMEI ....................................................................... 92 Individual settings (extended memory) ........................ 135 Input menu Operating input menus ..................................... 14 Setting the layout ............................................ 15 Interface AUX .............................................................. 47 iPod .............................................................. 40 USB .............................................................. 43 iPod ....................................................................... 40 Calling up the main menu .................................. 40 Fast forward/reverse ....................................... 42 Playlists ......................................................... 41 Repeating a track ............................................ 42 Searching for a track ....................................... 40 Shuffle function ............................................... 42 Skipping to the next track ................................. 42 Switching to iPod mode .................................... 40 Track list........................................................ 42 iPod interface .......................................................... 40 J Jack for iPod ........................................................... 40 L Landmark navigation ............................................... 160 Left rotary knob ....................................................... 10 Lift handset button.................................................... 12 List of previous calls ..........................................61, 78 Adding to a number ..................................62, 79 Calling a number ...................................... 61, 78 196 Index Lists Deleting a number ....................................61, 78 Displaying the list .....................................61, 78 Sending a message to a number from the list....... 78 Storing a number in the phonebook..................... 78 List of previous destinations ..................................... 144 List of received calls ..........................................62, 79 Adding to a number from the list .................63, 80 Calling a number from the list .....................62, 79 Deleting a number from the list ...................62, 79 Displaying the list .....................................62, 79 Sending a message to a number from the list....... 80 Storing a number from the list in the phonebook ... 79 Operating using voice control .......................... 178 Showing the first letters of the entries ................. 13 Loading a disc ......................................................... 36 Loading CDs/DVDs ................................................... 36 Location information ............................................... 111 Logbook ............................................................... 119 Activating/deactivating ................................... 119 Activating/deactivating the reminder ................. 119 Assigning a key ............................................. 123 Changing the contact person ........................... 121 Changing the driver........................................ 120 Changing the remarks .................................... 121 Changing the trip destination ........................... 120 Changing the trip purpose ............................... 121 Changing the trip type .................................... 120 Continuing recording ...................................... 121 Creating a contact person............................... 122 Creating a driver............................................ 122 Creating a new contact person......................... 121 Creating a new driver ..................................... 120 Creating a new trip destination......................... 120 Creating a new trip purpose ............................ 121 Creating a trip destination ............................... 122 Creating a trip purpose................................... 122 Deleting a contact person ............................... 123 Deleting a driver............................................ 123 Deleting a key assignment............................... 123 Deleting a trip destination................................ 123 Deleting a trip purpose ................................... 123 Deleting trips ................................................ 123 Editing data from the current trip...................... 120 Managing lists............................................... 122 Renaming a contact person ............................. 122 Renaming a driver.......................................... 122 Renaming a trip destination ............................. 122 Renaming a trip purpose ................................. 122 Setting the standard trip ................................. 119 Storing a refuelling stop.................................. 122 Transferring data ........................................... 124 Viewing the list of stored trips .......................... 122 Lowering the exterior mirror ..................................... 137 M Making a detour around a route section...................... 153 Manual frequency entry.............................................. 23 MAP ..................................................................... 166 Adapting the map view.................................... 169 Changing the scale ........................................ 166 Display of the total route ................................. 167 Displaying a 3D terrain model .......................... 169 Displaying a 3D town model............................. 169 Displaying destination/location ......................... 167 Displaying driving instructions in the map view .... 170 Displaying sections of the route........................ 168 Displaying the footer ...................................... 170 Displaying the map menu ................................ 170 Displaying the north arrow............................... 170 Displaying the satellite image........................... 169 Displaying traffic messages............................. 170 Moving......................................................... 166 Orienting the map to the north ......................... 170 Selecting display of the arrival time................... 170 Setting 3D display.......................................... 166 Setting 3D points of interest ............................ 169 Setting a 3D map........................................... 169 Setting autozoom .......................................... 167 Setting display of the arrival time...................... 170 Setting the colours for the map ........................ 170 Setting the display layout ................................ 168 Setting the display of speed limits..................... 169 Setting the junction zoom................................ 169 Memory buttons ....................................................... 22 Meridian Lossless Packing ......................................... 35 Microphone volume................................................... 66 MIXED .................................................................... 23 MIXED preset memory............................................... 23 MP3 .......................................................................35 MP3 CD Searching for a track........................................39 Searching for music .........................................39 Selecting a track..............................................37 Muting (audio source) ..................................................8 Muting (telephone)............................................. 58, 73 Muting the microphone (telephone)....................... 58, 73 N Navigation Activating alternative routes.............................143 Adding destinations
(personal destination memory)..........................147 Area search ..................................................151 Avoiding a stretch of road ...............................155 Calling a destination from the personal destination memory........................................148 Calling the destination.....................................146 Deleting a destination ........................... 145, 148 Destination input using geographical coordinates.158 Destination input using the map ........................158 Displaying the location of a destination
(list of previous destinations)............................145 Displaying the location of a destination
(personal destination memory)..........................147 Editing an address (list of previous destinations)..145 Editing an address (personal destination memory)147 Editing the name of a personal destination..........148 Entering an address .......................................141 Entering an address from the list of previous destinations......................................145 Entering an address from the personal destination memory........................................147 Entering the country .......................................142 Entering the junction.......................................143 Entering the street and number ........................142 Entering the town/postal code..........................142 Entering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the personal destination memory ...148 General operation ..........................................140 List of previous destinations.............................144 Personal destination memory ...........................146 Points of interest ...........................................151 Reloading data ..............................................164 Safety notice.................................................141 Sending a destination from the personal destination memory........................................149 Setting a detour.............................................153 Setting the volume of the announcement ............141 Starting route guidance...................................143 Starting route guidance with route alternatives activated......................................143 Stopovers.....................................................155 Stopping route guidance .................................143 Storing a destination (off-road navigation) ...........158 Storing a destination from the list of previous destinations in the personal destination memory ..145 Storing a position (off-road navigation) ...............159 Network selection .....................................................91 O Off-road navigation ..................................................159 Activating/deactivating....................................160 Landmark navigation.......................................160 Recording a trip section (trace).........................161 Safety notice.................................................160 Storing a destination.......................................158 Storing a position...........................................159 Tracing a route..............................................163 Opening the CD/DVD changer menu .............................11 Opening the changer menu .........................................11 Opening the rear blind automatically ...........................137 Operating ..................................................................9 Operating lever for the on-board computer ..................175 Options for route guidance .......................................153 Orienting the map to the north...................................170 P ParkAssist .............................................................114 Closing the display .........................................115 Switching the display on/off .............................115 Parking with the rear view camera display ...................117 Performing voice adaptation for the voice control system ...............................................177 Personal destinations...............................................146 Personal Identification Number (PIN) .............................73 Personal trip data....................................................113 Phonebook....................................................... 60, 76 Calling an entry........................................ 61, 76 Creating and storing an entry .............................76 Deleting an entry..............................................77 Deleting the contents of the SIM card ..................77 Deleting the phonebook........................... 71, 100 Editing an entry................................................77 Sending a vCard ...................................... 61, 77 Setting automatic transfer ......................... 70, 99 Setting sorting......................................... 70, 99 Setting the storage location ....................... 70, 98 Settings..........................................................70 Transferring .......................................... 71, 100 Transferring the phonebook entries manually.........71 Picture format ..........................................................32 Picture settings for TV mode .......................................31 PIN .........................................................................73 Pin Unblocking Key (PUK)............................................73 Playlists (iPod) ..........................................................41 Points of interest.....................................................151 Searching by category ....................................151 Searching by name.........................................152 Searching by telephone number........................152 Searching in the map view ...............................152 Previous calls ................................................... 61, 78 Previous destinations (navigation)...............................144 PTY filter .................................................................26 PUK ........................................................................73 R Radio ......................................................................22 PTY filter.........................................................26 RDS...............................................................25 Setting the mode .............................................22 Storing stations on station buttons ......................23 Traffic programme ...........................................24 Tuning to stations.............................................22 RDS........................................................................25 Switching radio text on/off.................................25 Switching RDS on/off........................................25 Switching regionalisation on or off.......................25 Rear view camera ...................................................116 Parking with the display...................................117 Picture settings..............................................117 Switching on grid lines ....................................117 Index 197 Switching the display on/off ............................ 116 Received calls...................................................62, 79 Recording (Sport display) Continuing.................................................... 128 Deleting ....................................................... 130 Evaluating .................................................... 129 Renaming..................................................... 130 Starting ....................................................... 127 Stopping...................................................... 128 Recording a trip section (trace) ................................. 161 Recording laps (Sport display) .................................. 127 Redialling ..................................................60, 75, 95 Reference lap (Sport display) Defining ....................................................... 131 Deleting ....................................................... 131 Renaming..................................................... 131 Resetting ..................................................... 131 Regional code.......................................................... 35 Rejecting a call ................................................. 59, 75 Reloading data....................................................... 164 Reloading navigation data ........................................ 164 Renaming Contact person (logbook)................................ 122 Driver (logbook) ............................................ 122 Recording (Sport display) ................................ 130 Reference lap (Sport display) ........................... 131 Trip destination (logbook)................................ 122 Trip purpose (logbook) ................................... 122 Repeating (track) ...................................................... 39 Repeating a track AUX BT.......................................................... 49 CD/DVD......................................................... 39 iPod .............................................................. 42 USB .............................................................. 46 Resetting personal settings ........................................ 20 Resetting settings..................................................... 20 Resetting trip data .................................................. 114 Restoring factory settings .......................................... 20 Restoring vehicle handover settings............................. 20 Right rotary knob...................................................... 11 Ringtone type ...................................................66, 91 Ringtone volume................................................66, 91 Route Displaying sections ........................................ 111 Route alternatives................................................... 143 198 Index S Safety notice (navigation) ......................................... 141 Scanning (radio mode)............................................... 23 Searching for a track iPod .............................................................. 40 MP3 CD ......................................................... 39 USB .............................................................. 44 Searching for music MP3 CD ......................................................... 39 USB .............................................................. 44 Sections of the route............................................... 111 Selecting a chapter (video DVD mode).......................... 38 Selecting a track CD/DVD......................................................... 37 MP3 CD ......................................................... 37 Selecting display of the arrival time in the map view...... 170 Sending a destination from the personal destination memory ................................................ 149 Sending own number................................................. 95 Setting 3D map display ............................................. 166 Adaptation of the central vents......................... 138 Air flow strength ............................................ 138 AudioPilot....................................................... 16 Automatic air circulation.................................. 138 Automatic call answering .................................. 95 Balance ......................................................... 15 Bass ............................................................. 15 Brightness (rear view camera).......................... 117 Brightness (TV)................................................ 31 Brightness of the display................................... 19 Call forwarding................................................ 93 Cancelling a detour ........................................ 154 Colour (rear view camera) ............................... 118 Colour (TV) ..................................................... 32 Colours for the display...................................... 18 Comfort options ............................................ 137 Contents of the personal display....................... 113 Contrast (rear view camera) ............................ 118 Contrast (TV) .................................................. 32 Day design ..................................................... 18 Daytime running lights .................................... 135 Display .......................................................... 18 Display layout in the map view.......................... 168 Displaying the total route in the map display ....... 167 DVD audio format ............................................ 38 DVD audio groups............................................ 38 Dynamic route planning................................... 154 Entry aid ...................................................... 137 Fade-out time ................................................ 135 Fade-out time for the interior lights.................... 136 Fader............................................................. 15 Fast/short route ............................................ 154 Folding in of the exterior mirrors....................... 137 Headlight alignment (driving on left/right) ........... 136 Keyboard layout .............................................. 15 Language ....................................................... 19 Language for voice control.............................. 175 Layout of the input menu................................... 15 Layout of the letters on the keyboard in the input menu ............................................. 15 Light options................................................. 135 Loudness ................................................16, 17 Lowering of the exterior mirror......................... 137 Making a detour around a section ..................... 153 Mode (AUX BT) ................................................ 48 Mode (AUX)..................................................... 47 Mode (CD/DVD) ............................................... 37 Mode (iPod) .................................................... 40 Mode (radio) ................................................... 22 Mode (TV)....................................................... 27 Mode (USB) .................................................... 44 Night design ................................................... 18 Opening of the rear blind................................. 137 Options for air conditioning.............................. 137 Orientation light ............................................. 136 Preset memory ............................................... 23 Rain sensor .................................................. 136 Rear wiper.................................................... 137 Reception country (TV)...................................... 31 Ringtone type.................................................. 91 Ringtone volume.............................................. 91 SDV (speed-dependent volume) .......................... 16 Sorting criteria for the station list........................ 26 Sorting of the station list (TV) ............................. 31 Sound conditioner............................................ 16 Station (radio) ................................................. 22 Station (TV)..................................................... 27 Surround.................................................16, 17 Switching the touchscreen on/off ....................... 19 Treble............................................................ 15 Units...................................................... 18, 19 Use of the upper ventilation zone ......................138 Volume.............................................................8 Volume of the navigation announcement.............141 Volume of the traffic programme announcements ..25 Wiper options ................................................136 Setting a block for a route section .............................153 Setting a detour......................................................153 Setting a fast/quick route.........................................154 Setting a perspective map........................................169 Setting a short route ...............................................154 Setting adaptation of the central vents........................138 Setting AM mode ......................................................22 Setting AudioPilot......................................................16 Setting automatic air circulation.................................138 Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook..................99 Setting autozoom....................................................167 Setting colours for the display.....................................18 Setting comfort options ...........................................137 Setting consumption..................................................20 Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) .........................154 Setting filtering of background noise ............................16 Setting FM mode ......................................................22 Setting folding in of the exterior mirrors ......................137 Setting light options ................................................135 Setting picture parameters (rear view camera) Brightness ....................................................117 Colour..........................................................118 Contrast.......................................................118 Setting picture parameters (TV) Brightness ......................................................31 Colour............................................................32 Contrast.........................................................32 Format...........................................................32 Setting ringtones ......................................................91 Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) .........................16 Setting sound conditioner...........................................16 Setting surround ............................................... 16, 17 Setting the air conditioning .......................................137 Setting the air flow strength......................................138 Setting the audio source ..............................................8 Setting the balance ...................................................15 Setting the bass .......................................................15 Setting the brightness (TV mode) .................................31 Setting the colours for the map .................................170 Setting the day design ...............................................18 Setting the daytime running lights ..............................135 Setting the display layout..........................................168 Setting the display of 3D points of interest ..................169 Setting the display of additional data (Sport display) ......132 Setting the display of speed limits..............................169 Setting the fade-out time ..........................................135 Setting the fade-out time for the interior lights ..............136 Setting the fader.......................................................15 Setting the headlight alignment (driving on left/right) .....136 Setting the junction zoom in the map view ...................169 Setting the keyboard layout ........................................15 Setting the language..................................................19 Setting the layout of the letters on the keyboard in the input menu..........................................................15 Setting the loudness.......................................... 16, 17 Setting the mode (CD/DVD) ........................................37 Setting the night design .............................................18 Setting the orientation light .......................................136 Setting the preset memory in radio mode......................23 Setting the reception country for TV mode.....................31 Setting the standard trip for the logbook .....................119 Setting the temperature display ...................................20 Setting the treble ......................................................15 Setting the units................................................ 18, 19 Setting the volume ......................................................8 Setting the volume for a voice control system announcement .............................................175 Setting transfer of your own number.............................95 Setting TV mode .......................................................22 Setting use of the upper ventilation zone .....................138 Setting wiper options ...............................................136 Settings Bluetooth (external Bluetooth audio source) .....49 Bluetooth (logbook)......................................124 Bluetooth (navigation)...................................149 Bluetooth (Sport display)...............................133 Bluetooth (telephone) ............................. 67, 95 Calls ..............................................................93 Display...........................................................18 Extended memory ..........................................135 Messages and data ........................................100 Phonebook.............................................. 70, 98 Picture settings (rear view camera) ...................117 Picture settings (TV) .........................................31 Radio mode ....................................................25 SIM card.........................................................92 Shuffle function Telephone (PCM telephone)................................91 Telephone settings ...........................................66 AUX BT...........................................................49 CD/DVD .........................................................39 iPod...............................................................42 USB...............................................................46 SIM card Deleting the contents ........................................77 Inserting the card .............................................72 SIM settings .............................................................92 SIM slot...................................................................10 Skipping a track (CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode) ...............10 Skipping tracks AUX BT...........................................................49 CD/DVD .........................................................39 iPod...............................................................42 USB...............................................................46 Slot for the SIM card..................................................10 SMS .......................................................................83 Accepting vCards.............................................88 Calling telephone numbers .................................89 Creating a template ..........................................90 Creating and sending a new text message............85 Creating using a text template ............................86 Creating with attached reply...............................85 Creating with new text............................... 84, 86 Deleting..........................................................87 Deleting vCards ...............................................89 Discarding vCards ............................................89 Displaying the complete text ..............................90 Editing and sending the text of the last message ...86 Editing vCards .................................................88 Forwarding......................................................87 Numbers in text messages ................................89 Reading..........................................................84 Reading a vCard...............................................87 Replying .........................................................84 Replying using a text template ............................85 Replying with Yes or No.....................................85 Storing coordinates ..........................................90 Storing telephone numbers ................................89 Using coordinates for route guidance...................90 SMS service centre .................................................100 SMS settings..........................................................100 SMS signal tone......................................................100 Index 199 Sound settings Setting AudioPilot ............................................ 16 Setting SDV.................................................... 16 Setting sound conditioner ................................. 16 Setting surround.......................................16, 17 Setting the balance.......................................... 15 Setting the bass .............................................. 15 Setting the fader ............................................. 15 Setting the loudness .................................16, 17 Setting the treble............................................. 15 Sport Chrono package ............................................ 127 Sport display ......................................................... 127 Continuing recording...................................... 128 Defining the reference lap ............................... 131 Deleting a lap................................................ 130 Deleting a recording....................................... 130 Deleting the reference lap ............................... 131 Ending a lap ................................................. 129 Evaluating a recording.................................... 129 Renaming a recording .................................... 130 Renaming the reference lap............................. 131 Resetting the defined reference lap................... 131 Setting the display of additional data................. 132 Starting a new lap.......................................... 129 Starting recording ......................................... 127 Stopping recording ........................................ 128 Storing a lap as the reference lap..................... 131 Timing the interval ......................................... 129 Transferring data........................................... 132 Stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher..................................................... 175 Starting a new lap (Sport display) .............................. 129 Starting a search (radio or TV mode)............................ 10 Starting route guidance ........................................... 143 Starting/stopping scanning AUX BT.......................................................... 49 CD/DVD......................................................... 39 USB .............................................................. 46 Station buttons ..........................................22, 23, 27 Station list........................................................22, 24 PTY filter (programme type)............................... 26 Setting sorting (TV) .......................................... 31 Setting sorting criteria...................................... 26 Station search ......................................................... 22 Status of the call diversion ......................................... 94 200 Index Stopovers ............................................................. 155 Deleting ....................................................... 157 Entering....................................................... 155 Reorganising................................................. 157 Storing ........................................................ 157 Via destinations ............................................. 156 Stopping route guidance.......................................... 143 Storing Coordinates (vehicle position) ............................ 90 Destination (off-road navigation)........................ 158 Destination from the list of previous destinations in the personal destination memory................... 145 Key assignment in the logbook......................... 123 Lap as reference lap ...................................... 131 Phonebook entry ............................................. 76 Position ....................................................... 159 Refuelling stop (logbook)................................. 122 Station (radio) ................................................. 23 Station (TV)..................................................... 28 Telephone number ....................................78, 79 Telephone numbers from a text message ............ 89 Storing a destination ......................................145, 158 Storing a lap as the reference lap (Sport display).......... 131 Storing a position (off-road navigation)........................ 159 Storing stations.................................................23, 28 Choosing a station in the station list and storing it . 24 Storing stations manually .................................. 24 Storing stations manually (TV) ............................ 28 Storing via an automatic station search (radio)...... 24 Storing via an automatic station search (TV) ......... 28 Storing TV stations ................................................... 28 Supplementary services............................................. 83 Supported audio formats ........................................... 35 Switching Switching to an external audio source ................. 47 Switching to an external Bluetooth audio source . 48 Switching to radio mode ................................... 22 Switching between day/night .............................18, 170 Switching between main menus................................... 12 Switching device on/off ............................................... 7 Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on .......... 117 Switching on/off......................................................... 7 RDS .............................................................. 25 Switching the touchscreen on/off ................................ 19 T Telephone Accepting a call........................................58, 74 Automatic call answering................................... 95 Bluetooth..................................................... 54 Call waiting ..............................................64, 81 Call waiting (swapping) and conference.........65, 82 Calling a phonebook entry ..........................61, 76 Changing the PIN ............................................. 92 Conducting calls with the hands-free unit.......58, 73 Dialling a number......................................60, 75 Direct dialling ...........................................60, 75 Displaying the IMEI ........................................... 92 Displaying the phonebook...........................60, 76 Ending a call ............................................59, 74 Entering the PIN .............................................. 73 Entering the PUK ............................................. 73 Establishing an additional call......................63, 81 Holding a call ...........................................60, 76 Inserting the SIM card....................................... 72 List of previous calls .................................61, 78 List of received calls .................................62, 79 Making an emergency call ................................. 83 Muting the microphone ..............................58, 73 Number of the SMS service centre ................... 100 Redialling ................................................60, 75 Rejecting a call.........................................59, 75 Selecting a network.......................................... 91 Setting call forwarding...................................... 93 Setting the call volume...................................... 66 Setting the microphone volume .......................... 66 Setting the redial function.................................. 95 Setting the ringtone type............................66, 91 Setting the ringtone volume ........................66, 91 Setting transfer of your own number ................... 95 Settings (PCM telephone) .................................. 91 SMS settings ................................................ 100 Supplementary services.................................... 83 Switching call waiting on/off .............................. 94 Switching on/off .............................................. 91 Switching the PIN prompt on and off ................... 93 Switching the SMS signal tone on/off ................ 100 Text messages (SMS)....................................... 83 Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................63, 80 Using a stored PIN ........................................... 93 Telephone conference ....................................... 65, 82 Text message (SMS) .................................................83 Accepting vCards.............................................88 Calling telephone numbers.................................89 Creating a template..........................................90 Creating and sending a new text message............85 Creating using a text template............................86 Creating with attached reply...............................85 Creating with new text .............................. 84, 86 Deleting .........................................................87 Deleting vCards ...............................................89 Discarding vCards............................................89 Displaying the complete text ..............................90 Editing and sending the text of the last message ...86 Editing vCards.................................................88 Forwarding .....................................................87 Numbers in text messages ................................89 Reading..........................................................84 Reading a vCard ..............................................87 Replying .........................................................84 Replying using a text template............................85 Replying with Yes or No ....................................85 Storing coordinates..........................................90 Storing telephone numbers................................89 Using coordinates for route guidance ..................90 Timing the interval (Sport display) ..............................129 TMC messages ......................................................109 Touch tone dialling ............................................ 63, 80 TP (traffic programme)...............................................24 Tracing ....................................................... 161, 163 Tracing a route.......................................................163 Track list iPod...............................................................42 USB...............................................................46 Traffic Message Channel ..........................................109 Traffic messages (TP)................................................24 Traffic programme Activating traffic programme announcements........24 Setting the volume of the announcements ............25 Transferring data (logbook).......................................124 Transferring data (Sport display)................................132 Trip data ...............................................................113 Tuner......................................................................22 Tuning to stations Tuning to stations by entering the frequency manually...........................................23 Tuning to stations using the station buttons ..........22 Tuning to stations using the station buttons (TV) ....27 Tuning to stations using the station list.................22 Tuning to stations via a station search .................22 Tuning to stations via a station search with scanning ..................................................23 Tuning to stations (TV) Displaying the TV picture ...................................27 Tuning to TV stations .................................................27 TV Calling up the main menu...................................27 Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) .....................30 Setting picture parameters ................................31 Setting sorting of the station list .........................31 Setting the reception country .............................31 Setting TV mode ..............................................27 Storing TV stations...........................................28 Tuning to TV stations ........................................27 Video text .......................................................29 Twin SIM cards .........................................................72 U Undoing a menu selection...........................................11 USB........................................................................43 Fast forward/reverse ........................................46 Repeating a track.............................................46 Searching for a track ........................................44 Searching for music .........................................44 Shuffle function................................................46 Skipping to the next track..................................46 Starting/stopping scanning ................................46 Switching to USB mode.....................................44 Track list ........................................................46 USB interface of the PCM ...........................................43 Using geographical coordinates from an SMS for route guidance .........................................................90 V vCard Vehicle functions Accepting .......................................................88 Discarding (deleting) .........................................89 Editing............................................................88 Sending.................................................. 61, 77 Adaptation of the central vents .........................138 Air flow strength.............................................138 Automatic air circulation ..................................138 Comfort options.............................................137 Daytime running lights.....................................135 Entry aid.......................................................137 Fade-out time ................................................135 Fade-out time for the interior lights ....................136 Folding in the exterior mirrors...........................137 Headlight alignment (driving on left/right)............136 Light options .................................................135 Lowering the exterior mirror.............................137 Opening the rear blind.....................................137 Options for air conditioning ..............................137 Orientation light .............................................136 Rain sensor...................................................136 Rear wiper ....................................................137 Use of the upper ventilation zone ......................138 Wiper options ................................................136 Video text ................................................................29 Calling up video text .........................................29 Placing video text over the TV picture ..................30 Selecting a video text page................................29 Voice control ..........................................................172 Activating......................................................175 Commands ...................................................173 Deactivating ..................................................175 Emergency cases...........................................185 Hands-free microphone ...................................172 Operating example for CD/DVD mode................182 Operating example for navigation mode .............189 Operating example for radio mode ....................179 Operating example for telephone mode..............185 Operating lists ...............................................178 Index 201 Performing voice adaptation............................ 177 Setting quick dialogue .................................... 176 Setting repetition of commands ....................... 176 Setting the display of hints .............................. 176 Setting the language ...................................... 175 Setting the volume of the announcement ........... 175 Speech intelligibility........................................ 172 Symbols ...................................................... 175 Using the help function ................................... 177 Voice entries ................................................ 174 Voice control commands Global commands.......................................... 173 Local commands........................................... 173 Volume of the navigation announcement ..................... 141 W WAV....................................................................... 35 WMA ...................................................................... 35 202 Index Radio frequency ranges VHF (FM): 87.5 - 108 MHz
(manual tuning in 100 KHz increments) MW (AM): 531 - 1602 KHz
(manual tuning in 1 KHz increments) Tuning steps used during automatic station search VHF (FM) 100 KHz MW (AM) 9 kHz Regional codes for video DVDs Code 1: USA, Canada and US territories Code 2: Europe, Greenland, South Africa, Egypt and Middle East, Japan Code 3: Southeast Asia, South Korea, Hong Kong, Indonesia, Philippines, Taiwan Code 4: Australia, New Zealand, Mexico, Central America, South America Code 5: Russia and other countries of former USSR, Eastern Europe India, Africa Code 6: Peoples Republic of China Code 7: Not currently assigned Code 8:
International territory such as cruise liners and airplanes Affiliated countries for TV tuner country settings Africa: Egypt Egypt Africa: Morocco Morocco Africa: North, South East Africa Algeria, Equatorial Guinea, Ethiopia, Eritrea, Gambia, Ghana, Cameroon, Canary Islands, Cape Verde, Kenya, Comoros, Liberia, Libya, Madeira, Malawi, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Mozambique, Nepal, Nigeria, Sahara, Zambia, So Tom and Prncipe, Seychelles Africa: Southern Africa Angola, Botswana, Lesotho, Namibia, South Africa, Tanzania, Sierra Leone, Zimbabwe, Somalia, Sudan, Swaziland, Tunisia, Uganda, other African countries, other Far Eastern countries, other overseas countries Africa: Central Africa, Madagascar Benin, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Ivory Coast, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Gabon, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Congo, Madagascar, Mali, Niger, Runion, Rwanda, Senegal, Togo, Chad, Central African Republic America: Falkland Islands Falkland Islands America: French overseas departments French Guyana, Guadeloupe, Martinique, New Caledonia America: Caribbean United States Virgin Islands, Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, British Virgin Islands, Curaao
(Netherlands Antilles), Dominica, Dominican Republic, Grenada, Haiti, Jamaica, Cayman Islands, Cuba, Netherlands Antilles, Puerto Rico, St. Lucia, St. Martin (Netherlands Antilles), St. Pierre and Miquelon, St. Vincent and the Grenadines, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos Islands Technical data America: Central America Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama, other Latin American countries America: North America Bermuda, Canada, United States of America (USA), other American countries America: South America Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Ecuador, Guyana, Columbia, Paraguay, Peru, Surinam, Uruguay, Venezuela Asia: Brunei Brunei Darussalam Asia: China China Asia: Hong Kong Hong Kong Asia: India India Asia: Japan Japan Asia: Kuwait Kuwait Asia: Malaysia Malaysia Asia: Central Asia, Mongolia, Bhutan Bhutan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan Asia: Myanmar Myanmar (Burma) Asia: Middle East, Afghanistan Afghanistan, Gaza Strip, Iraq, Iran, Israel, Yemen, Jordan, Lebanon, Qatar, Syria, Cyprus, other Middle and Near Eastern countries Technical data 203 Europe: France, Monaco France, Monaco Europe: Northern, Central, Southern, South Eastern Europe Albania, Andorra, Azores, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Ceuta/Melilla, Denmark, Germany, Faroe Islands, Gibraltar, Greece, Greenland, Iceland, Italy, Federal Republic of Yugoslavia, Croatia, Luxembourg, Madeira, Malta, Macedonia, Montenegro, Netherlands, Norway, Austria, Portugal, Romania, Sweden, Switzerland, Slovenia, Spain, St. Helena, Turkey, Vatican City, other Western Europe countries Europe: Eastern Europe Armenia, Azerbaijan, Estonia, Georgia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldavia, rest of the former USSR, Russian Federation, Ukraine, Hungary, Belarus, other Eastern European countries, other Comecon countries Europe: Poland, Slovakia, Czech Republic Poland, Slovakia, Czech Republic Pacific Fiji, French Polynesia, Kiribati , Marshall Islands, Micronesia
(Federated States), Nauru, Oceania, Papua New Guinea, Samoa, Tonga, Wallis and Futuna
"Other countries" means countries in this region not explicitly mentioned in the list Spelling of country names subject to correction Asia: North Korea Democratic Peoples Republic of Korea Asia: Oman Oman Asia: Philippines Philippines Asia: Saudi Arabia Saudi Arabia Asia: Singapore Singapore Asia: South Asia Bangladesh, Indonesia, Cambodia, Laos, Macau, Maldives, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, West Indies, other Asian countries Asia: South Korea Republic of Korea Asia: Taiwan Taiwan Asia: Thailand Thailand Asia: United Arab Emirates Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Asia: Vietnam Vietnam Australia Australia, Australia/Oceania, Tuvalu, Vanuatu Australia: New Zealand New Zealand, New Zealand/Oceania, Pitcairn Island, Solomon Islands Europe: England, Ireland British Indian Ocean Territory, Great Britain, Ireland Europe: Finland Finland Technical data 204 Dear Customer, In conformance with current EC guidelines, any person may operate this unit. This unit conforms to the current valid European or harmonised national standards. It is guaranteed that the unit conforms to the currently applicable specifications regarding electromagnetic compatibility. Interference with other electrical/electronic devices caused by the unit, or interference with this unit caused by other electrical/electronic devices, is largely prevented. Harman/Becker Automotive Systems declares herewith that this device, PCM 3.1, conforms to the basic requirements of applicable EC regulations and especially to the basic requirements and other relevant regulations of the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC. Further information is available on our Internet site http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche. List of countries with GSM and Bluetooth approval (extract) Albania Andorra Austria Belgium Bosnia Herzegovina Bulgaria Canada China Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Georgia Germany Greece Guernsey Hungary Iceland Ireland Isle of Man Italy Jersey Latvia Further information is available on our Internet site http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche. Lithuania Luxembourg Macedonia Malta Moldova Monaco Montenegro Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Reunion Russia Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United Kingdom USA 205 Bluetooth approval QDID: B015165 Information on the laser equipment At the date of manufacture this laser product was classified as a class 1 laser product in compliance with the national/international standards DIN EN 60825-1 : 2003-10 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. The laser beam in this class 1 laser product is so weak that it does not represent a hazard when used as intended. This product is designed in such a way that the laser beam is confined to the interior of the unit. However, this does not mean that the laser installed in the housing could not be classed as a laser product in a higher class without its housing. For this reason, you should never open the unit housing (nullification of warranty or goodwill). Technical data of the laser installed in the unit:
Output of laser beam: 0.68mW (DVD) / 0.85mW (CD) Wavelength of laser beam: 665nm (DVD) / 795 nm (CD) The laser diode is not pulsed during operation. 206
1 | Users Manual Declaration | Users Manual | 760.74 KiB |
HI Harman International Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH S6flinger Str. 100 89077 Ulm, Germany Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH | Sflinger Str. 100 | 89077 Ulm Phone: +49 (0) 731-3994-136 Fax: +49 (0) 731-3994-61136 Email: HKlemm@harmanbecker.com PHOENIX TEST-LAB GmbH Product Certification K6nigswinkel 10 32825 Blomberg Ulm, 10/10/2008 FCC ID T8G-BE96XX To Whom It May Concern:
The FCC statements (15.19 Labelling Requirements)
"This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation and (15.21 Information to the User) under relevant title CAUTION TO USERS or FCC WARNING or NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment will both be placed in a prominent location in the users manual for the North American Market. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me at the address shown below. Thank you for your attention to this matter. Yours sincerely, Harman/Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Ul Mer fi Management Board: Dr. Klaus Blickle (Chairman), Dr. Udo Hills, Michael Mauser, Regis Baudot Chairman Gt the Supervisory Board: Ansgar Rempp | Domicile: Karlsbad | Local Court Mannheim: Register No. aG1S25 Premium Solutions for Audio and Infotainment
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-07-30 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2009-07-30
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Harman Becker Automotive Systems
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0014703417
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
Becker-Göring-Strasse 16
|
||||
1 |
Becker-Gring-Strasse 16
|
|||||
1 |
Karlsbad-Ittersbach, N/A
|
|||||
1 |
Germany
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
B******@phoenix-testlab.de
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
T8G
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
BE96XX
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
S**** D******** V********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
+4972******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+4972********
|
||||
1 |
s******@harman.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | PCM (Porsche Communication Management) | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Output Power listed is conducted. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
7layers AG
|
||||
1 | Name |
R****** M****
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
49-21********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
49-21********
|
||||
1 |
r******@7layers.de
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0016000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC